2005 chevrolet malibu owner manual

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-8Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10Child Restraints ....................................... 1-32Airbag System ......................................... 1-51Restraint System Check ............................ 1-62

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10Windows ................................................. 2-15Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-21Mirrors .................................................... 2-32OnStar® System ...................................... 2-34HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-36Storage Areas ......................................... 2-39Sunroof .................................................. 2-42

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-22Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-31

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-45Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-52

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-35

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-40Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-44Tires ...................................................... 5-46Appearance Care ..................................... 5-74Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-83Electrical System ...................................... 5-84Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-93

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index ................................................................ 1

2005 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

Information Provided by:

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the MALIBUEmblem, and the name MALIBU are registeredtrademarks; and the name MALIBU MAXX is atrademark of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it isneeded while you are on the road. If the vehicle issold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle. If thisis done, it can help you learn about the featuresand controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words worktogether in the owner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 05MALIBU A First Edition ©2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii


Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book. Weuse a box and the word CAUTION to tell about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

iii


Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv


These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v


✍ NOTES

vi


Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Six-Way Power Driver Seat ..............................1-3Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4Head Restraints .............................................1-6Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-6

Rear Seats .......................................................1-8Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8

Safety Belts ...................................................1-10Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16Driver Position ..............................................1-16Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-23Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults .......................................1-27Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-31Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31

Child Restraints .............................................1-32Older Children ..............................................1-32Infants and Young Children ............................1-34Child Restraint Systems .................................1-38Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-41Top Strap ....................................................1-41Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-43Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-43Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System .........................................1-46Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ............................................1-46Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ............................................1-49Airbag System ...............................................1-51

Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-54When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-58What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-62

Restraint System Check ..................................1-62Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-62Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-63

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1


Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you do not want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

If your vehicle has amanual seat adjustment,lift the bar locatedunder the front of the seatto unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure theseat is locked in place.

Power Lift SeatIf your vehicle has this feature, to move the power liftseat forward or rearward, pull up on the lever locatedunder the front of the driver’s seat to unlock it. Slide theseat to where you want it and release the lever. Tryto move the seat with your body to make sure the seatis locked into place.

To raise or lower the power lift seat, hold the switchlocated on the outboard side of the driver’s seat upor down.

1-2


Six-Way Power Driver Seat

If your vehicle has this feature, the power seat control islocated on the outboard side of the driver’s seat.

To adjust the power seat, do the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by pushing thecontrol toward the front or back of the vehicle.

• Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by holdingthe center of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion byholding the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion byholding the rear of the control up or down.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has this feature, the handle is located onthe outboard side of the driver’s seat. Ratchet thehandle down to increase lumbar support. Ratchet thehandle up to decrease lumbar support.

1-3


Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats.

The buttons are locatedon the outboard cornerof the driver and frontpassenger seat.

Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on. Theseat will heat to the high setting. The indicator lightabove the switch will be lit next to the number 2.

Press the top of the switch again to go to the lowheat setting. The indicator light will be lit next tothe number 1.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seat and move the seatback to thedesired position. Release the lever to lock theseatback. Pull up on the lever without pushing on theseatback, and the seatback will return to the uprightposition.

1-4


But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can not do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can not do its job because itwill not be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can not do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

1-5


Head Restraints

The head restraints on both the front and rear seats areadjustable. Press the button on the side of the postto adjust the head restraint. Slide the head restraint upor down so that the top of the restraint is closest tothe top of your head. This position reduces the chanceof a neck injury in a crash.

Passenger Folding Seatback

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carry longerobjects, such as skis, be sure any such cargois not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that object toward a person.This could cause severe injury or even death.Secure objects away from the area in which anairbag would inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 1-54 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback can strike andinjure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in acrash. Remove or secure all items beforedriving.

1-6


You can fold the front passenger’s seatback down toallow for more cargo space or as a temporary table whilethe vehicle is stopped.

To fold the seatback down, do the following:

1. Make sure the seatback is at the most uprightposition and locked.

2. Push forward on one ofthe levers located oneither side of theback of thepassenger’s seatback.

3. Fold the seatback down.

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Push down on one of the levers and pull theseatback up to lock it into place. Make surethe safety belt is not twisted or caught in theseatback.

2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure itis locked into position.

3. Use the reclining front seatback lever to adjust theseatback to a comfortable position.

1-7


Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

Folding the SeatbackYour vehicle may have a split folding rear seatback.

To fold down the rear seatback on the sedan, dothe following:

1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the grayhandles located on the upper part of the trunkopening. The driver’s side handle will openthe larger side of the seatback. The passenger’sside handle will open the smaller side of theseatback.

2. Once a handle is pulled, the seatback can bepushed open through the trunk, or pulled openfrom inside the vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback on the MAXX, dothe following:

1. Pull up on and hold the lever located on the side ofeither rear seat.

1-8


2. Once a lever is pulled, the seatback can be pushedinto the down position.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure itis locked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will not providethe protection needed in a crash. The personwearing the belt could be seriously injured.After raising the rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are not twisted.

To return the seatback to the upright position, push theseatback up until you hear a click. Then pull on theseatback to make sure it is secure.

1-9


Rear Sliding Seat (MAXX Only)If your vehicle is the MAXX model your rear seat willslide forward or rearward to allow more cargo space inthe rear.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlockthe seat. Slide the seat to where you want it andrelease the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth tobe sure the seat is locked in place.

If your vehicle has the rear seat entertainment system,the rear seat should only be moved forward to acertain point in order to use the DVD player properly.Slide the rear seat up so the front edge of the seatcushion is lined up with the mark on the carpet retainertrim on the floor of the driver’s side rear seat. If therear seat is up past the mark, you will not be ableto open the DVD screen.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she can notwear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

1-10


{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-34.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many ofthem, people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter...a lot!

1-11


Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seaton wheels.

Put someone on it.

1-12


Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-13


or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-14


Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accidentif I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you are upside down. And your chance ofbeing conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Every airbagsystem ever offered for sale has required the use ofsafety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that hasairbags, you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in anaccident — even one that is not your fault — youand your passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-15


How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wearit properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-16


If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt thelatch plate and keep pulling until you can bucklethe belt.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-31.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

1-17


The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-18


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-19



A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-20



A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-21



A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-22


To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

To move it down, pushdown the release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can move theadjuster up by pushing therelease button up. After youmove the adjuster to whereyou want it, try to move itwithout pushing the releasebutton to make sure it haslocked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder.

1-23


Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt — except for onething. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraint lockingfeature. If this happens, just let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-24


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Hereis how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt thelatch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-31.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-25


3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-26


{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for small adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positionsthe belt away from the neck and head.

1-27


Malibu SedanThere is one guide for each outside passenger positionin the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints andbooster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guidesmay be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is howto install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt, and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

1-28


3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-24.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turnthe guide and clip inward and slide them between theseatback and the interior body, leaving only theloop of the elastic cord exposed.

1-29


Malibu MAXXThere is a safety belt routing guide attached to eachoutside passenger position in the rear seat of theMalibu MAXX. Here is how to use the safety beltrouting guide:

1. Slide the edge of the safety belt (D) through theopening at the top of the guide (B).

2. Adjust the safety belt so that it lies flat against thelower level (C) or the upper level (A) of the guide.Be sure the safety belt lies flat against the guide.

3. Buckle position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-24.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove the safety belt from the guide, slide the edgeof the safety belt through the opening at the top ofthe guide.

1-30


Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Althoughyou cannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts for the driver and right frontpassenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’sforward movement in a moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probably othernew parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-63.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer willorder you an extender. It is free. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender hasbeen designed for adults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

1-31


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-32


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can not properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small Adults on page 1-27. If the childis sitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder beltstill is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crashthe child’s upper body would have the restraint thatbelts provide.

1-33


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

1-34


{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby does notweigh much — until a crash. During a crash ababy will become so heavy it is not possible tohold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-35


{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and older

CAUTION: (Continued)


children, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, heightand age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

1-36


The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint, state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. Thisis necessary because a newborn infant’s neckis weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into therestraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsalways should be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-37


Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-38


A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,and some high-back booster seats have a five-pointharness. A booster seat can also help a child to seeout the window.

1-39


Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has strapsthat come down over each of the infant’sshoulders and buckle together at the crotch. Thefive-point harness system has two shoulder straps,two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield maytake the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield hasshoulder straps that are attached to a flat padwhich rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- orarmrest-type shield has straps that are attachedto a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or tothe side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system orthe LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury. When securing an add-onchild restraint, refer to the instructions that come with therestraint which may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-40


Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,therefore, recommend that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facinginfant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing childseat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in the front passengerseat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the child restraint in arear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” Itcan help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored tothe vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strap beinganchored. Others require the top strap always to beanchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint. If yours requires that the top strapbe anchored, do not use the restraint unless it isanchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

1-41


In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in TopStrap Anchor Location on page 1-43. Be sure to usean anchor point located on the same side of the vehicleas the seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

1-42


Top Strap Anchor LocationYour vehicle has top strap anchors already installed forthe rear seating positions. For the sedan you willfind them behind the rear seat on the filler panel. Forthe MAXX, you will find them on the back of therear seatback.

Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in theright front passenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top strap be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraint say thatthe top strap must be anchored. There is no placeto anchor the top strap in this position.

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will findanchors for all three rear seating positions. The anchorsare visible between the seatback and the seat cushion.There is a specific way to attach a child restraint tothe anchors in the three possible positions.

Sedan

MAXX

1-43


A. Passenger’s SideRear Seat

B. Center Rear Seat

C. Driver’s SideRear Seat

Make sure to attach the child restraint at the properanchor location.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Some restraintsalso use another vehicle anchor to secure a toptether strap.

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower AnchorageC. Top Tether

1-44


A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower Anchorage

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto its anchorage points, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured orkilled. Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

1-45


Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seatingposition you want to use, where the bottom of theseatback meets the back of the seat cushion.See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-43.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on thechild restraint to the LATCH anchorages in thevehicle. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-41.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook thetop tether from the top tether anchorage and thendisconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCHanchorages.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-43. See Top Strapon page 1-41 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-46


Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-47


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

1-48


Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-43.

There is no top strap anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires that thetop strap be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-41 if the childrestraint has one.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat, you will be using thelap-shoulder belt to secure the restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passengerairbag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 1-2.


1-49


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-50


6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. You may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver andanother frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Yourvehicle may also have a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof mounted side impact airbags areavailable for the driver and the passenger seated directlybehind the driver and for the right front passengerand the passenger seated directly behind thatpassenger.

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags,the words AIR BAG will appear on the airbag coveringon the side of the front seatback closest to the door.If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags,the words AIR BAG will appear on the airbag coveringon the ceiling near the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s window.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

1-51


Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt, even ifyou have airbags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Airbags are designed to workwith safety belts but do not replace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,or in many side crashes. And, for someunrestrained occupants, frontal airbags mayprovide less protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided in the past.

Side impact airbags are designed to inflate onlyin moderate to severe crashes where something



hits the side of your vehicle. They are notdesigned to inflate in frontal, in rollover or inrear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly, whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,as you would be if you were leaning forward, itcould seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for airbag inflation beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. Occupantsshould not lean on or sleep against the door.

1-52


{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-34.

There is an airbagreadiness light onthe instrument panelcluster, which showsthe airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34for more information.

1-53


Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

1-54


If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the right front passenger, it is in the side of thepassenger’s seatback closest to the door.

1-55


If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver and the person seated directly behind thedriver, it is in the ceiling above the side windows.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbagfor the right front passenger and the person seateddirectly behind that passenger, it is in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

1-56


{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering. And, if your vehicle has sideimpact airbags, never secure anything to theroof of your vehicle by routing the rope ortiedown through any door or window opening.If you do, the path of an inflating side impactairbag will be blocked. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into that personcausing severe injury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Donot put anything between an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or put anything onthe steering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.

1-57


When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact exceeds a predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholds take into accounta variety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crashis likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbagswill or should deploy is not based on how fast yourvehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensorswhich help the sensing system distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a more severe frontalimpact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbagsinflate at a level less than full deployment. Formore severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall thatdoes not move or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph

(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).(The threshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.)

Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagcould inflate at a different crash speed than ifthe object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflateat a different crash speed than if the object doesnot deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are notintended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not likely help the occupants.

1-58


Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes. A side impact airbag willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would notlikely help the occupant. A side impact airbag willonly deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For sideimpact airbags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing systemtriggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel, instrument panel, the side of thefront seatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling of thevehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal airbags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would nothelp you in many types of collisions, including frontalor near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severeside collisions for side impact airbags.

1-59


What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the airbaginflated. Some components of the airbag module — thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, theside of the seatback closest to the door for theseat-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped) and thearea along the ceiling of your vehicle near the sidewindows for the roof–mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) — will be hot for a short time. The partsof the bag that come into contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There will be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver fromseeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does itstop people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan not get out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

1-60


In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts foryour airbag system. If you do not get them,the airbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts. Theservice manual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records information aftera crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders on page 7-9

• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that theairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer for service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbagcovering on the driver’s and right front passenger’sseatback (if equipped), or the side impact airbagcovering on the ceiling near the side windows(if equipped), the bag may not work properly. Youmay have to replace the airbag module in thesteering wheel, both the airbag module and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’sairbag, the airbag module and seatback for thedriver’s and right front passenger’s seat-mountedside impact airbags (if equipped), or side impactairbag module and ceiling covering for theroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

1-61


Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround your vehicle. You do not want the system toinflate while someone is working on your vehicle.Your dealer and the service manual have informationabout servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-62


Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system was not being used at the time ofthe collision.

If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash, thespecial part of the safety belt that goes through the seatto the adjuster may need to be replaced.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part about the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew buckle assembly will be there to help protect you ina collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driver andfront passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, evenif the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractor assembliescontain the safety belt pretensioners. Have yoursafety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle hasbeen in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stayson after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34.

1-63


✍ NOTES

1-64


Keys ...............................................................2-3Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks ............................................2-10Door Locks ..................................................2-10Power Door Locks ........................................2-10Door Ajar Reminder ......................................2-11Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-12Lockout Protection ........................................2-12Trunk (Sedan) ..............................................2-13Liftgate (MAXX) ............................................2-14

Windows ........................................................2-15Power Windows ............................................2-16Sun Visors ...................................................2-16

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-19PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-19

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22Starting Your Engine .....................................2-22Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-23Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-25Parking Brake ..............................................2-27Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-29Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-30Engine Exhaust ............................................2-30Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-31

Mirrors ...........................................................2-32Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-32Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-32Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-32Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® ............................................2-33Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-33Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-34Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-34

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1


OnStar ® System .............................................2-34HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-36

Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-36Storage Areas ................................................2-39

Glove Box ...................................................2-39Cupholder(s) ................................................2-39

Center Console Storage Area .........................2-40Map Pocket .................................................2-40Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..........2-40Table ..........................................................2-41

Sunroof .........................................................2-42

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-2


Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Thechildren or others could be badly injured oreven killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

2-3


One key is used for theignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the key has abar-coded key tag. This tag may be removed by yourdealer before it is delivered.

Each tag has a key code on it that tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep thetag in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be ableto have one made easily using this tag. If you needa new key, go to your dealer for the correct key code.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemIf equipped, the keyless entry system operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

2-4


At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation

The following functionsmay be available if yourvehicle has the remotekeyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has thisfeature, it may be started remotely. See “RemoteVehicle Start” following for more detailed information.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Shown, without RemoteStart Similar

2-5


Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.The interior lamps will turn off after all of the doorsare closed. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled through theDIC, the horn will also chirp to indicate locking hasoccurred.

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doors, and liftgate will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lamps will flash twiceto indicate unlocking has occurred.

V (Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release): The trunk orliftgate will unlatch when this button on the transmitter ispressed and held for approximately one second. Youcan open the sedan trunk with the transmitter when thevehicle is stationary. You can open the liftgate onthe MAXX only when the vehicle is in PARK (P).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press this buttonto locate your vehicle. The horn will sound three timesand the headlamps and parking lamps will flashthree times. Press and hold the button for three secondsto sound the panic alarm. The horn will sound and theheadlamps and parking lamps will flash for 30 seconds.Press the button again to cancel the panic alarm.

Programmable Horn ChirpThrough the Driver Information Center (DIC), you maychoose whether or not to have a horn sound whenyou use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock orunlock the doors.

See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 formore information.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has codedthe new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum offour transmitters matched to it.

2-6


Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about four years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will notwork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.

The Key FOB Batt Low message in the vehicle’s DICwill display if the remote keyless entry transmitter batteryis low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter. To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry

transmitter do the following:

1. Use a flat thin object to separate the bottom halffrom the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with the newone. Make sure the positive side of the batteryfaces up. Use one three-volt, CR2032, orequivalent, type battery.

3. Put the two halves back together. Make sure thecover is on tightly, so water will not get in.

2-7


Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature. Thisfeature allows you to start the engine from outside of thevehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating orair conditioning systems and rear window defogger.When the remote start system is active and the vehiclehas an automatic climate control system, it willautomatically regulate the inside temperature. Normaloperation of the system will return after the key is turnedto the ON position.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters, for example, requiring a person usingremote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so.Check local regulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is lowon fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature will not operate if the key is inthe ignition, a door is open, the hazard warningflashers are on, the hood is not closed or two remotevehicle starts have been provided. Once two remotevehicle starts have been provided, the remote startfeature will not start the engine again until the enginehas been started with the key.

Your remote keyless entry transmitter, with the remotestart button, provides an increased range of operation.However, the range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to be closer toyour vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry System on page 2-4 for additional information.

2-8


/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock buttonand then press and hold this button to use the remotestart feature.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, dothe following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,then immediately press and hold the transmitter’sremote start button until the vehicle’s turn signallights flash or for two seconds if the lights are notvisible. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressingthe remote start button again after the vehicle hasstarted will turn off the ignition.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turnon and remain on while the vehicle is running.

4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,turn the key to the ON position to start the engineand drive.

If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut offafter 10 minutes unless a time extension has beendone. To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following:

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at thevehicle and press the remote start button untilthe parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The remote start feature provides two separate starts,each with 10 minutes of engine running. If you press theremote start button on the keyless access transmitteragain before the first 10 minutes of engine running timehas expired, 10 minutes is added to the remainingminutes. For example, if the remote start buttonis pressed again after five minutes of the engine runtime, 10 minutes is added and you now have 15 minutesof engine running. Once two remote starts or 20 minutesof the engine running have been provided, the vehiclemust be started normally with the ignition key toget more remote starts.

2-9


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use your key or remote keylessentry transmitter, if equipped. Turn the keycounterclockwise to unlock the door. Turn the keycounterclockwise a second time to unlock all doorsat the same time and a third time to open the trunkor liftgate.

From the inside, lock and unlock the door by moving themanual lock knob down and up, or by using the powerdoor lock switches.

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s door.

2-10


Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors andliftgate, if equipped. Press the bottom of the switch tolock all doors and liftgate, if equipped.

The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.Rear seat passengers must use the manual lockknob on their doors.

Door Ajar ReminderIf one of the doors is not fully closed while the ignition ison and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:

• a chime will sound

• the DOOR AJAR message will display through theDriver Information Center (DIC) until the door isclosed. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-50.

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver to delay the locking of thevehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.See Lockout Protection on page 2-12.

Press the driver’s power door lock switch or the remotekeyless entry transmitter lock button once. With thekey removed from the ignition and the driver’sdoor open, the following will occur:

• three chimes will sound to signal the delay

• all doors will lock and the parking lamps willflash once five seconds after the last door hasbeen closed

• the horn will chirp if the horn chirp feature isenabled. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-46.

If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,the doors will not lock until five seconds after alldoors are closed.

If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lockbutton is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, thedoors will lock immediately.

If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlockbutton is pressed, the doors will unlock immediatelyand not lock automatically after the doors are closed.

This feature is turned on at the factory but may beturned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).

2-11


Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock alldoors automatically when the following are met:

• all doors are closed

• the ignition is on

• the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).

This feature cannot be disabled.

When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P), alldoors will unlock.

If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors arelocked, have that person use the manual lock knobor power door unlock switch.

The power door lock and unlock functions can beprogrammed through prompts displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). These prompts allow youto choose various lock and unlock settings. SeeDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature prevents the driver’s door from beinglocked using the power door locks, if the key is left inthe ignition and a door is open.

Pressing the power door lock switch will lock all thedoors and then unlock the driver’s door.

Pressing and holding the power door lock switch formore than three seconds will override this feature.

If you remove the key from the ignition, or if you use themanual door lock or the remote keyless entrytransmitter, you could still lock your key inside yourvehicle. Always remember to take your key with you.

2-12


Trunk (Sedan)To unlock the trunk from the outside, use the key or theremote keyless entry transmitter. When closing thetrunk, close from the center to ensure it fully latches.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You cannot see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Climate ControlSystem in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.

Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release

Press the remote releasebutton, located on thelower edge of the driver’sdoor, to open the trunklid or the liftgate.

You can open the trunk lid on the sedan while thevehicle is stationary.

You can open the liftgate on the MAXX only while thevehicle is in PARK (P).

2-13


Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk may damage it. Use theemergency trunk release handle only to help youopen the trunk lid.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located inside the trunk of the sedan model onthe trunk latch. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull the release handle up to open thetrunk from the inside.

Liftgate (MAXX)To open the liftgate, press the trunk button on theremote keyless entry transmitter or the remote trunkrelease button located on the lower edge of thedriver’s door.

To lock or unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or the transmitter.

You can also use the key in the driver’s door lockcylinder to unlock and open the liftgate. Turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle and back to the centertwice to unlock the liftgate and three times to openthe liftgate.

If the liftgate is unlocked, you can manually open it bypressing the touchpad switch located on the undersideof the liftgate trim panel, slightly to the right of center.

2-14


Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.

2-15


Power Windows

The power windowswitches are locatedon the armrest on thedriver’s door. In addition,each passenger door has aswitch for its own window.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window also has an express-down feature.This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front of theswitch part way, and the driver’s window will open asmall amount. If the front of the switch is pressed all theway down and released, the window will go all theway down automatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front ofthe switch momentarily. To raise the window, pulland hold the front of the switch.

Window LockoutThe driver’s power window controls also include alockout button.

o: Press the lockout button to stop the rearpassengers from using their window switches. Thedriver and front passenger can still operate all thewindows with the lock on. When the red part of theswitch is visible you have returned to normal windowoperation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors. Youcan also remove them from the center mount and swingthem to the side, to block out glare from the side. Thevisors also have extenders that can be pulled out.

Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrorslocated on the passenger and driver’s side visor.When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

2-16


Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may have acontent theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the system by doingany one of the following:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterlock button.

• Press the power door lock switch while the driver’sdoor is open.

• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylinder clockwise.

The system will arm either:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors and the liftgate(MAXX model) are closed,

• Sixty seconds with any door open

If you press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter a second time while all the doors andliftgate are closed, the system will arm immediately.The system will still arm in sixty seconds if a dooror liftgate is open. When the opened door or liftgate isclosed, it will also become armed.

The security light, located on the instrument panelcluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has beeninitiated. Once the system is armed, the security light willflash once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second, thismeans that a door or the liftgate is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock thecar with the lock levers on the doors.

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one of thefollowing:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button.

• Turn the ignition on.

• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylindercounterclockwise.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

2-17


How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activated by either:

• Opening the driver’s door or liftgate (MAXX model).This will cause a ten second pre-alarm chirpfollowed by a thirty second full alarm of hornand lights.

• Opening any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter. This will also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the driver’s door key lock cylinderand turn it counterclockwise. This will also disarmthe system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This willalso disarm the system.

Simulated Armed ModeIf you choose not to arm the system or if proper armingcan not be completed, the Content Theft Deterrentsystem will flash the security light once everythree seconds after a one minute delay with all thedoors closed. This flashing serves as a visual deterrent;however, the system is not armed.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press the unlock orlock buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter,it means that the content theft security systemalarm was triggered previously.

Passive ArmingIf passive arming is enabled through the DIC, thesystem will arm itself 60 seconds after cycling theignition off and closing all doors.

2-18


PASS-Key ® III+Your PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.


1. this device may not cause interference, and

2. this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

PASS-Key® III + uses a radio frequency transponder inthe key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

PASS-Key ® III+ OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you don’t have to doanything special to arm or disarm the system. It workswhen you insert or remove the key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III + system senses that someoneis using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’sstarter and fuel systems. The starter will not work andfuel will stop flowing to the engine. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number of electricalkey codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does notstart and the security light comes on, the key mayhave a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

2-19


If the engine still does not start, and the key appears tobe undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuseson page 5-85. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicledoes start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealerwho can service the PASS-Key® III + to have a newkey made. In an emergency, contact Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-6 for more information.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III + decoder to “learn”the transponder value of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed forthe vehicle. The following procedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all the currently programmedkeys are lost or do not operate, you must see yourdealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III +to have keys made and programmed to the system.

See your GM dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III + to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has “+” stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If the engine will not start,see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key to off, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to onwithin five seconds of removing the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed. It may not be apparent thatthe security light went on due to how quickly the keyis programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are tobe programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart your engine ifyou turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III + system, however,is not working properly and must be serviced byyour dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by thePASS-Key® III + system at this time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III + key, seeyour GM dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III + to have a new key made.

2-20


Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast orslow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.

Ignition Positions

With the key in the ignitionswitch, you can turn it tofour different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or break thekey. Use the correct key and turn the key only withyour hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. Ifnone of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

9 (OFF): This is the only position from which youcan remove the key. It also locks your ignition andtransaxle. A warning chime will sound if you open thedriver’s door while the ignition is off and the key is left inthe ignition.

2-21


ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use thingslike the radio and windshield wipers while the engineis not running.

Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed ortowed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-35.

R (ON): This position unlocks the ignition. It is also theposition to where the key returns after you start theengine and release the switch. The switch will stay inthis position while the engine is running. But even whilethe engine is not running, you can use ON to operateyour electrical accessories, and to display someinstrument panel warning lights.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The ignition switch willreturn to the ON position for normal driving.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow the radio tocontinue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to OFF.

Your radio will work when the ignition key is in ON orACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON to OFF,the radio will continue to work for up to 10 minutes oruntil the driver’s door is opened.

Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position — that isa safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn yourignition key to START. When the engine starts, letgo of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. Wait about15 seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If your engine will not start, or starts but then stops,it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Trypushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the keyin START for not more than 15 seconds at a time.This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

2-22


Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can change theposition of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature isdesigned for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannotmove farther away from the standard position, but canmove rearward for better pedal reach.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) or have the ignitionoff for this feature to operate. If the system sensesunusually high resistance while the pedals arebeing adjusted, such as a driver’s foot pushing thebrake pedal, it is designed to disable the switch.Simply remove the obstruction and try to adjust thepedals again.

The switch used to adjustthe pedals is located onthe left side of theinstrument panel.

To use your adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature,do the following:

The adjustable pedal feature is meant to be used withthe adjustable seat and adjustable steering wheelcontrols to reach a safe and comfortable position.

1. Adjust your seat to a comfortable position whereyou can comfortably reach other controls such asthe radio and climate controls.

2. Adjust the throttle and brake pedals to reach acomfortable and safe operating position.

3. Adjust the steering wheel to a safe operatingposition.

2-23


Engine Coolant HeaterIn very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater, if your vehicle has this feature, canhelp. You will get easier starting and lower fuel usageduring engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior tostarting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C),use of the coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in the plug end ofthe cord. This will prevent operation of the enginecoolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0°F(−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The engine coolant heater cord is located nearthe engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before use, to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you do not, itcould be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advicefor that particular area.

2-24


Automatic Transaxle Operation

Your automatic transaxlehas a shift lever locatedon the console betweenthe seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It isthe best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.



Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-28. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-38.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before startingthe engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxleshift lock control system. You have to apply your regularbrake before you can shift from PARK (P). If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press theshift lever button before moving the shift lever.)See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-29 later inthis section.

2-25


REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see IfYou Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-28.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not racing when shiftingyour vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If youneed more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that itis moving slowly or not shifting gears as youincrease speed may damage the transaxle. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away. You can drive inLOW (L2) when you are driving less than 35 mph(55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.

LOW (L): This position gives you access to FOURTH,THIRD, SECOND and FIRST gears for more powerbut lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can use iton very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theelectronic range select is put in LOW (L1), the transaxlewill not shift into lower gears until the vehicle is goingslow enough.

2-26


Electronic Range Select ModeThis feature allows you to select lower drivinggears when the shift lever is in LOW (L). The buttonfor this mode is located on the left side of the shiftlever knob.

When the shift lever is first moved into the LOW (L)position, the display in the instrument panel shows L3.Press the (−) end of the button on the shift leveronce for L2 and once more for L1. Press the (+) end ofthe button once each to return to L2, L3 and L4. Theshift lever must be moved back to DRIVE (D) to turn offthe electronic range select mode.

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, push down the parking brakepedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, thebrake system warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-36.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarilyon the parking brake pedal with your left foot until youfeel the pedal release. If the parking brake is notreleased when you begin to drive, the brake systemwarning light will be on and a chime will sound warningyou that the parking brake is still on.

A message will also appear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) to remind you to release the parking brake.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-38.

2-27


Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-38.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in thebutton on the shift lever and pushing the shift leverall the way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After youhave moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can movethe shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushingthe button.

If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fullylocked in PARK (P).

2-28


Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl inthe transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)on page 2-28.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to apply your regular brakebefore you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition isin ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation onpage 2-25.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever and push the shift lever all the wayinto PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into the gear you wish. Pressthe shift lever button before moving the shift lever.

2-29


Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannotsee or smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strangeor different.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or overroad debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-30


Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-30.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 4-24.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, alwaysset your parking brake and move the shiftlever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.

2-31


Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorThis mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, to adjustthe angle of the mirror, move the mirror to a position thatallows you to see out of the back window. To adjustthe height of the mirror, adjust the arm that connects themirror to the windshield.

To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the levertoward you to the night position.

Manual Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

If your vehicle has this feature, this mirror has a knoblocated at the bottom of the mirror. It is used to changethe mirror from day to night position. To reduce glarefrom headlamps behind you while driving at night, rotatethe knob clockwise. For daytime driving rotate theknob counterclockwise.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-34 formore information about the services OnStar® provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearviewmirror. This feature enables the mirror to sensenighttime glare from vehicle headlamps from behind andautomatically dim to reduce the glare to a safe level.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each time thevehicle is started. Press the OFF button once andthe green indicator light located to the left of the buttonwill go out indicating the feature is off. To turn thefeature back on, press and release the AUTO buttonand the green indicator light will come on.

2-32


Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearviewmirror with the OnStar® System.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each time thevehicle is started. To turn automatic dimming off oron, press the left button below the mirror. A greenindicator light will be on when automatic dimming is on.

While turned on, this mirror functions exactly like theautomatic dimming mirror described previously.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-34 for moreinformation about the service OnStar® provides.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrors, arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

Move the selector switch located below the four-waycontrol pad to the left or right to choose either the driver’sside or passenger’s side mirror. To adjust a mirror, usethe arrows located on the four-way control pad to movethe mirror in the desired direction. Adjust each outsidemirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind itcan be seen while sitting in a comfortable driving position.Keep the selector switch in the center position when notadjusting either outside mirror.

2-33


Both mirrors can manually be folded by pulling themtoward the vehicle. This feature may be usefulwhen going through a car wash or a confined space.Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normalposition, before driving.

Outside Power Heated MirrorsIf the vehicle has this feature, when the rear windowdefogger is turned on, the heated driver’s andpassenger’s outside power mirrors are warmed to helpclear them of ice, snow and condensation. See“Rear Window Defogger” under Climate Control Systemon page 3-22 for more information. Also see OutsidePower Mirrors on page 2-33 for mirror operation.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from thedriver’s seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,look farther away than they really are.

OnStar ® SystemOnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in the vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press theOnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

Terms and conditions of the Subscription ServiceAgreement can be found at www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com.

2-34


OnStar ® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe andSound Plan is included for the first year. You canextend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to theDirections and Connections Plan to meet your needs.For more information, press the OnStar® button to speakwith an advisor.

Safe and Sound Plan• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification

• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Tracking

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• Remote Diagnostics

• Online Concierge

Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar ® Personal CallingAs an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Callingcapability is available if your hand-held cell phone islost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-freewireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voicecommands with no additional contracts and no additionalroaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®

Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide inthe vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar®

advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or by calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorVirtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Callingthat uses minutes to access up-to-date weather andtraffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,stock quotes, entertainment and more. You are also ableto listen and reply to your E-mail through your vehicle’sspeakers. Customize your information profile atwww.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide formore information.

2-35


HomeLink ® Transmitter

HomeLink, a combined universal transmitter andreceiver, provides a way to replace up tothree hand−held transmitters used to activate devicessuch as gate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink information can be found on the internetat www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®

transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.




Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

Programming the HomeLink ®

TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

2-36


Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®

Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink®

on the internet at: www.homelink.com or bycalling 1-800-355-3515.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

Programming HomeLink ®

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/orthird transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink®

buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theHomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicatorlight in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressed andreleased.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.

2-37


If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You donot want to repeat step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

2-38


Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.Do not hold the two outside buttons for longerthan 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” following this section.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink ®

ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®

at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open, pull the handle down and pull the glove boxdoor down until it stops and is fully open.

Cupholder(s)There is one cupholder located at the rear of the shiftlever and one is to the side of the shift lever.

Pull down the door on the back of the center console touse the rear seat cupholders.

2-39


Center Console Storage AreaThere is a storage compartment in the center consolearea. To open the lower compartment, pull up onthe release at the front edge of the armrest. Your vehiclemay have an accessory power outlet inside of thestorage area. See Accessory Power Outlets onpage 3-21 for more information.

Map PocketYour vehicle may have storage pockets located on thefront edge of the seats, the door panels or the backof the front seats.

Your vehicle may also have a console picture clip tohold photos located near the center of the instrumentpanel and a parking pass holder located near thedriver’s side door trim.

Rear Compartment StoragePanel/CoverYour vehicle may be equipped with an adjustablepanel/cargo cover feature. The panel/cargo cover canbe adjusted into three positions.

To use the panel in the lower position, do the following:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thelower guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock itin place.

MAXX

2-40


The panel can be used in this position if you needadditional space above the panel. Place the cargo ontop of the panel in this position.

{CAUTION:

If you were to carry things on the adjustablepanel when it is in the upper (cargo cover) orcenter positions, during a sudden vehiclemovement or a crash, those things could bethrown around in the vehicle. You or otherscould be injured. When it is in the upper orcenter position, always secure any cargo onthe floor beneath the panel/cover.

To use the panel in the center position, do the following:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into themiddle guides.


3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of thepanel to lock it in place.

The panel can be used in this position when you haveto place a flat or spare tire in the rear cargo area.

To use the panel in the upper position, do the following:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thetop guides.


3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of thepanel to lock it in place.

This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area.The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic sideup. The panel may also be used as a table in thisposition. See “Table” following for more information.

TableYour vehicle will be equipped with an adjustable panelthat also functions as a table. The maximum loadfor the table is 100 lbs distributed (45 kg).

To set up the table, do the following:

1. With the adjustable panel in the upper positionextend it out, with the plastic side up. The panelwill only extend in the upper position.

2. Rotate the knob to release the leg from the plasticside of the table and rotate leg outward.

3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at therear edge of the vehicle.

Make sure to place the table leg securely onto theliftgate lock striker.

2-41


Notice: Driving with the panel extended into thetable position could damage your vehicle. Alwayshave the panel in the stored position while youare driving.

Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of thetable could damage it. Always be sure that the itemsthat are placed on the surface of the table are ofmoderate temperature.

There are four grocery hooks located on the table foryour convenience.

SunroofIf the vehicle has asunroof, the switch tooperate it is located on theoverhead consolebetween the sun visors.The sunroof will onlyoperate when the ignitionis in ACC or whileretained accessory power(RAP) is active.

The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or it canbe express-opened all of the way.

To open the sunroof to the vent position, open thesunshade by hand. Then push the back edge of thesunroof switch and release it.

To fully open the sunroof, push the back edge of theswitch again and release it.

The vent and open positions can be adjusted for drivingcomfort by pushing and holding the forward edge ofthe switch until the sunroof moves to the desiredposition.

To close the sunroof, push the forward edge of theswitch and hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroofwill stop if the switch is released during operation.Remember to close the sunshade by hand.

The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehiclehas an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of thesliding glass panel, damage will occur and thesunroof may not open or close properly. Alwaysclose the glass panel before closing the sunshade.

2-42


Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9Windshield Washer .......................................3-10Cruise Control ..............................................3-11Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-17Headlamps Off in PARK (P) ...........................3-17Delayed Headlamps ......................................3-17Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-17Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-18Fog Lamps ..................................................3-19Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19Dome Lamp .................................................3-19Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-20Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-20

Rear Reading Lamps ....................................3-20Trunk Lamp .................................................3-20Cargo Lamp .................................................3-20Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-21

Climate Controls ............................................3-22Climate Control System .................................3-22Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-26Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-31Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-32Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-33Trip Odometer ..............................................3-33Tachometer .................................................3-33Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-34Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-34Charging System Light ..................................3-35Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-36Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-37Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .........3-37Enhanced Traction System Active Light ............3-38Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-38

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1


Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-39Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-39Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-42Security Light ...............................................3-43Cruise Control Light ......................................3-43Highbeam On Light .......................................3-43Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-44Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-46DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-50

Audio System(s) .............................................3-52Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-52Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-53Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-53

Radio with CD (Up Level) ..............................3-58Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-68Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-81Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-95Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Without Rear Seat Entertainment) .............3-111Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(With Entertainment System) .....................3-113Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-114Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-115Radio Reception .........................................3-116Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-116Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-117Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-117Fixed Mast Antenna (MAXX Only) .................3-118Backglass Antenna (Sedan Only) ..................3-118XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-118

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2


✍ NOTES

3-3


Instrument Panel Overview

3-4


The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control Systemon page 3-22.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

C. Steering Wheel Controls and Cruise Controls(If Equipped). See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 3-115 and Cruise Control on page 3-11.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-32.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See WindshieldWipers on page 3-9.

F. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-21.G. Hazard Warning Flasher. See Hazard Warning

Flashers on page 3-6.H. Center Air Outlets. See Climate Control System on

page 3-22.I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-52.J. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 3-22.K. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-39.

L. Side Air Outlets. See Climate Control System onpage 3-22.

M. Adjustable Pedal Buttons (If Equipped). SeeAdjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-23.

N. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 3-19.

O. Storage CompartmentP. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps on

page 3-19.Q. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.R. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.S. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.T. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power

Outlets on page 3-21.U. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.V. Center Console Storage Compartment. See

Center Console Storage Area on page 2-40.W. Traction Control Button (If Equipped). See Enhanced

Traction System (ETS) on page 4-8.X. Rear Wiper/Washer Controls (If Equipped).

See Windshield Washer on page 3-10.

3-5


Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatednear the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on your steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steering wheel tothe highest level to give your legs more room when youenter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

3-6


To tilt and telescope the wheel, pull down the lever.Then move the wheel to a comfortable position, pull upthe lever to lock the wheel in place. The wheel canbe adjusted up and down as well as forward andbackward.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 3-8.

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.

• Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 3-14.

3-7


Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positions allowyou to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or downto the latched position. When the turn is finished, thelever will return automatically.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return by itselfwhen you release it.

A warning chime signal will come on if you have leftyour turn signal on for more than 2/3 mile (1 km).

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and otherdrivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signala turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check thefuse. See Fuses on page 5-85.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.

When the high beams areon, a light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is in ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlampsmomentarily to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever towardyou until the high-beam headlamps come on, thenrelease the lever to turn them off.

3-8


Windshield Wipers

Use this lever located on the right side of the steeringwheel to operate the windshield wipers.

9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off thewindshield wipers.

x (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position tochoose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the intermittentadjust band down for a longer delay or up for a shorterdelay. The wiper speed can only be manually adjustedwhen the lever is in this position.

& (Speed Sensitive Wipers): Move the lever to thisposition for speed sensitive operation. When youselect this position, the delay will change with yourvehicle’s speed. The wiper speed will increase as yougo faster and decrease as you go slower.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the firstsetting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low speed.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the secondsetting past intermittent, for wiping at high speed.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to thisposition for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until thewindshield wipers start; then let go. The windshieldwipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,hold the lever down longer.

Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent youfrom seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoiddamage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomedamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clearaway snow or ice to prevent an overload. If themotor gets stuck turn the wipers off, clear away thesnow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on formore than thirty seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps willturn on automatically. They will turn off when the wipersare turned off.

3-9


Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, push in the button at the endof the stalk until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washers will stop, butthe wipers will continue to wipe for about three cyclesand will either stop or will resume the speed youwere using before.

Rear Window Washer/Wiper

If your vehicle has a rearwindow wiper, the switch islocated on the centerconsole. See InstrumentPanel Overview onpage 3-4.

Press the top of the switch to put the wiper in continuousoperation mode. Press the bottom of the switch to putthe wiper system in delay mode. Press the center of theswitch to wash and wipe the rear window. Washerfluid will spray up the glass as long as the switchis pushed. When the switch is released, the wipers willcontinue to cycle about three times. The neutralposition will turn the wiper system off. There is oneshared washer fluid reservoir for the front and rearwindshield wipers. See Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-30.

3-10


Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain aspeed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This can reallyhelp on long trips. Cruise control does not work atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheel spinning,and you could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

3-11


The cruise control buttons are located on thesteering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

+RES (Resume): Press this part of the button toresume a set speed and to accelerate the speed.

−SET (Set): Press this part of the button to set a speedand to decrease the speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.The indicator light on the button will come on.

2. Get to the speed you want.

3. Press the −SET part of the control button andrelease it. The cruise symbol will display in theinstrument panel cluster to show the systemis engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course,disengages the cruise control. The cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster will also go out indicatingcruise is no longer engaged. To return to your previouslyset speed, you do not need to go through the setprocess again. Once you’re going about 25 mph(40 km/h) or more, you can press the +RES part of thebutton briefly.

This will take you back up to your previously chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Disengage the cruise control but do not turn it off.

• If the cruise control system is already engaged,press the +RES part of the button. Hold it there untilyou get up to the speed you want, and then releasethe button. To increase your speed in very smallamounts, press the +RES part of the button brieflyand then release it. Each time you do this, yourvehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-12


Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the −SET part of the button until youreach the lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push the−SET part of the button briefly. Each time youdo this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to disengage the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise controldisengages, the cruise symbol in the instrumentpanel cluster will go out.

• Press the on/off button, this will turn off the cruisecontrol system.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-13


Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:

2 (Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This positionautomatically turns on the Daytime Running Lampsduring daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps at night.

P (Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/Onswitch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,this only works when the vehicle is in PARK (P).

When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of theswitch to off/on will turn off the Automatic HeadlampSystem. Rotating the switch to off/on again will turn theAutomatic Headlamp System back on. The AutomaticHeadlamp System is always turned on at the beginningof an ignition cycle.

The following charts show the condition of the vehicle’sexterior lamps when the transmission is not inPARK (P) and the switch is moved to each position:

3-14


United States Exterior Lamp Positions for DaytimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF OFF OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON

DRL/TurnSignal Lamp OFF ON OFF OFF

Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON

United States Exterior Lamp Positions for NighttimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF ON OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF ON ON ON

DRL/TurnSignal Lamp OFF OFF OFF OFF

Taillamp OFF ON ON ON

3-15


Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for DaytimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF OFF OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON

DRL/TurnSignal Lamp ON ON ON OFF

Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON

Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for NighttimeLamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp ON ON ON ON

Parking Lamp ON ON ON ON

DRL/TurnSignal Lamp OFF OFF OFF OFF

Taillamp ON ON ON ON

3-16


Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door and turn off theignition while leaving the lamps on, you willhear a warning chime.

Headlamps Off in PARK (P)This feature works when the ignition is on and it is darkoutside. To turn the headlamps off when it is darkoutside but keep other exterior lights on, turn the exteriorlamp control to the parking lamp position. In thisposition, the parking lamps, sidemarker lamps, taillamps,license plate lamps and instrument panel lights will beon, but the headlamps will be off.

To turn on the headlamps along with the other lampswhen it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control tothe AUTO or headlamp position.

This feature will work for Canadian vehicles if thevehicle is in PARK (P).

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature will continue toilluminate the headlamps for 20 seconds after thekey is turned to off at night. Then the headlamps willautomatically turn off.

To override the 20 second delayed headlamp featurewhile it is active turn the switch at the end of theturn signal/multifunction lever to the off/on position.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make both front turn signal lampsturn on when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO. Inaddition, Canadian vehicles DRL will also turnon if you have turned on your parking lamps.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, and instrument panel lights will not beilluminated.

3-17


The DRL system will be off any time your vehicle is inPARK (P). The DRL system on U.S. vehicles canalso be turned off by using the off/on switch for oneignition cycle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, your automatic systemwill turn on your headlamps at the normal brightnessalong with other lamps such as the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, instrument panel lights, andinterior switch backlighting.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it is not covered, or the headlampsmay remain on when you do not need them.

The system may also be on when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcast weather or a tunnel.This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between the daytimeand nighttime operation of the automatic lamp controlsystem so that driving under bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect the system. The automaticlamp control system will only be affected when the lightsensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer thanthis delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticlamp system will come on immediately. Once youleave the garage, it will take about one minute for theautomatic lamp system to change to DRL if it islight outside. During that delay, your instrument panelcluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sureyour instrument panel brightness control is in the fullbright position. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 3-19.

To idle your vehicle with the system off, turn the ignitionon and rotate the exterior light switch to the off/onposition. For Canadian vehicles, the transaxle must stayin PARK (P) for this function.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamps when you need them.

3-18


Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the button for thefog lamps is located onthe instrument panel, to theleft of the steering wheel.

If your vehicle has fog lamps, the ignition must be on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicatorlight in the button will glow when the fog lamps areon. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for this featureis located on theinstrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.

Dome LampThe switch on this lamp has three positions. The onposition will turn on the lamp anytime. The door positionwill turn on the lamp whenever a door is opened. Theoff position will shut off the lamp completely, even whilea door is opened. Your dome lamp may be equippedwith two rear reading lamps. See Rear Reading Lampson page 3-20.

3-19


Entry/Exit LightingWhen you open any door, the lamps inside of yourvehicle will go on. These lamps will fade out 20 secondsafter the last door is closed, or when the ignition isturned on after all doors have been closed. These lampswill also go on when you press the trunk releasebutton, the unlock button or the panic button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

The lamps inside of your vehicle will turn on for about10 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition toprovide an illuminated exit.

Front Reading LampsPush the lens to turn the reading lamps on and off. Thereading lamps will turn on when the door is open ifthe dome lamp is in the door position. The readinglamps will also turn on with the dome lamp switch in theon position. The lamps will not turn on if the door isopen and the dome lamp is in the off position.

Rear Reading LampsThe vehicle’s dome lamp may have two readinglamps. The reading lamps turn on and off by pushingon the lens.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.

Cargo LampIf your vehicle is the MAXX model, it has a cargo lamp.The cargo lamp comes on when the liftgate is opened.If you want to leave the liftgate open you can turn off thecargo lamp by pushing on the lens.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery run-down protection featuredesigned to protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visor vanity)is left on while the ignition is turned off, the batteryrun-down protection system will automatically shut thelamp(s) off after 20 minutes. This will avoid drainingthe battery.

3-20


To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:

• Turn on the ignition.

• Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.

• Open a door.

• Press any remote keyless entry transmitter button(if equipped).

• Press the remote trunk release button.

• Press the power door lock switch.

The battery run-down feature will also be activatedwhen any door on the vehicle is left open and theignition is in OFF.

Accessory Power OutletsWith accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephone.

For vehicles with Traction Control system, the accessorypower outlets are located on the front of the centerconsole storage area and also inside the consolestorage compartment. The compartment has notchesthat allow power cords to be routed outside of theconsole while the lid is closed. On vehicles withoutTraction Control, both outlets are located on the front ofthe center console storage area. There is also anoutlet in the rear cargo area of the MAXX.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Always turnoff electrical equipment when not in use and donot plug in equipment that exceeds the maximumamperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem see your dealer for additional informationon accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

3-21


Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle. If your vehicle hasthe remote start feature, the climate control system willfunction as part of the remote start feature. Thesystem will return to the last settings the vehicle was atwhen it was turned off.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. The fan must be on to run the air-conditioningcompressor.

To change the air delivery settings, turn the right knobto select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to theinstrument panel outlets, and the remaining air tothe floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward theside windows.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets with some air directed to the side windowoutlets.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost modes. Information on defogging and defrostingcan be found later in this section.

3-22


: (Outside Air): Press the right side of this button toturn the outside air mode on. When this mode is selected,air from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout yourvehicle. When the button is pressed, an indicator light willcome on to let you know that it is activated. The outsideair mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode. Pressing this button willcancel the recirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of the buttonto turn the recirculation mode on. When recirculationmode is selected, the air inside the vehicle will berecirculated through the climate control system and thevehicle, not from outside your vehicle. This mode ishelpful when you are trying to limit odors from enteringyour vehicle and for maximum air conditioningperformance in hot weather. When the button ispressed, an indicator light above the button will comeon to let you know that it is activated. The recirculationindicator light will blink three times if you try to userecirculation in a mode that it can not be used in. Onlyuse this mode when it is needed for comfort, sincewindow fogging will rapidly occur if the air conditioningcompressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button will cancel the outside air mode.When you switch to the defog or defrost modesthe system will automatically move from recirculation tooutside air. When you move the mode knob back toanother air delivery mode, the system will moveback into recirculation. When the vehicle or fan is turnedoff and back on, the system will default to outside airautomatically. Only use recirculation mode when itis needed for comfort, since window fogging may occur.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature inside your vehicle.

When it’s cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use theengine coolant heater, if equipped, to provide warmer airfaster to your vehicle. An engine coolant heater warmsthe coolant that the engine uses to provide heat towarm the inside of your vehicle. For more information,see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-24.

3-23


# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When the airconditioning button is pressed, an indicator lightwill come on to let you know that air conditioningis activated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select air conditioning.

4. Select the recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods of timemay cause the air inside of your vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening, after the air inyour vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air-conditioning system removes moisture fromthe air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to choose from toclear fog or frost from your windshield. Use thedefog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode splits the air between thewindshield and the floor outlets with a small amountdirected to the side windows. When you select thismode, the system turns off recirculation automatically.The air-conditioning compressor will run unless theoutside temperature is at or below freezing. Theair-conditioning compressor will operate although theindicator light will not be on. The air-conditioningindicator light will turn off when defog is selected. If theair-conditioning button is pressed while in defogmode, the indicator light will turn on. If the button ispressed again, the light will turn off. The recirculationmode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-24


1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield with some air directed to the floor vents. In thismode, the system will automatically force outside air intoyour vehicle. The air-conditioning compressor will rununless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.The air-conditioning compressor will operate although theindicator light will not be on. The air-conditioning indicatorlight will turn off when defrost is selected. If theair-conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode,the indicator light will turn on. If the button is pressedagain, the light will turn off. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.

To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:

1. Select the defrost mode.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light will come onto let you know that the rear window defogger isactivated. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rearwindow as possible.

If driving below 50 mph (80 kph), the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 15 minutes after the buttonis pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will onlyrun for about seven minutes before turning off. Thedefogger can also be turned off by pressing the buttonagain or by turning off the engine.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear window defogger will remain ononce the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the reardefogger will automatically be turned on if it is coldoutside. The indicator light will be on. When the vehicletransitions out of the remote start mode, the reardefogger will turn off.

Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporaryvehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similarto the defogger grid.

3-25


Automatic Climate Control SystemIf your vehicle has this system, you can automaticallycontrol the heating, cooling and ventilation in yourvehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fanspeed control and the air delivery mode control knobs toactivate the automatic system. When automaticoperation is active the system will control the insidetemperature and air delivery.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Place the fan knob and the mode knob to AUTO.The display will now show the current settemperature. When auto is selected, the airconditioning operation and air inlet will beautomatically controlled. The air conditioningcompressor will run when the outside temperatureis over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normallybe set to outside air. If it’s hot outside, the airinlet may automatically switch to recirculate insideair to help quickly cool down your vehicle.

3-26


2. Set the temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with an initialtemperature setting and allow about 20 minutes forthe system to regulate. Press the up or downarrow temperature buttons to adjust the temperaturesetting as necessary. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 60°F (15°C) the system will remain atthe maximum cooling setting. If you choosethe temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) the systemwill remain at the maximum heat setting. Choosingeither maximum setting will not cause the vehicleto heat or cool any faster.Be careful not to cover the sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near the windshield. Thissensor regulates air temperature based on sunload, and also turns on your headlamps.Also be careful not to cover the sensor grille on thelower right side of the climate control faceplate.This senses the inside vehicle temperature neededfor proper regulation.To avoid blowing cold air at start-up in cold weather,the system will delay turning on the fan untilwarm air is available. The length of delay dependson the engine coolant temperature. Turning thefan knob will override this delay and change the fanto a selected speed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the climatecontrol display will initially show “AS” in place of thetemperature to indicate the remote start has beenactivated. The system will automatically regulate thetemperature.

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

9(Off): Select this position on the fan knob to turn offthe entire climate control system. Outside air will stillenter the vehicle, and will be directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed by changing the modeposition. The temperature can also be adjusted usingeither the up or down arrow temperature buttons.

9 (Fan): The knob with the fan symbol allows you tomanually adjust the fan speed.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to theinstrument panel outlets, and the remaining air tothe floor outlets.

3-27


6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to the sidewindow outlets.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost modes. Information on defogging and defrostingcan be found later in this section.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of this button toturn the outside air mode on. When this mode is selected,air from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout yourvehicle. When the button is pressed, an indicator light willcome on to let you know that it is activated. The outsideair mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode. Pressing this button willcancel the recirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of the buttonto turn the recirculation mode on. When recirculationmode is selected, the air inside the vehicle will berecirculated through the climate control system and thevehicle, not from outside your vehicle. This mode ishelpful when you are trying to limit odors from enteringyour vehicle and for maximum air conditioningperformance in hot weather. When the button ispressed, an indicator light above the button will comeon to let you know that it is activated. The recirculationindicator light will blink three times if you try to userecirculation in a mode that it can not be used in.

Only use this mode when it is needed for comfort, sincewindow fogging will rapidly occur if the air conditioningcompressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculationfeature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system willrevert to the auto recirculation function.

If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,the light on the button will flash three times and goout to let you know this is not allowed. This is to preventwindow fogging.

When the weather is cool or damp, operating the systemin recirculation for extended periods of time may causefogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, selecteither defog or defrost. Make sure the air conditioning ison. You will want to allow the air conditioning to runautomatically to help dehumidify the air.

Temperature Control: Press the up and down arrowsto increase or decrease the temperature inside thevehicle.

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the airconditioning compressor on and off. A light above thebutton will illuminate when the air conditioning is on.

When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, thesystem will run the air conditioning automatically tocool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.

3-28


On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hotinside air escape. This reduces the time it takes foryour vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windowsclosed for the air conditioner to work its best.

On cool, but sunny days while using manual operationof the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warmair to the floor and cooler air to the instrumentpanel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, pressthe temperature buttons to the desired setting.

In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify theair inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, thesystem will maximize its performance by usingrecirculation as necessary.

Heating: On cold days when using manual operation ofthe automatic system, choose floor mode to deliverair to the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,push the temperature buttons to the desired setting.

If you want to use the automatic mode, turn the knob toAUTO and adjust the temperature by pressing thetemperature buttons.

The heater works best if you keep the windows closedwhile using it.

Defogging and DefrostingYou can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog orfrost from your windshield. Use the defog mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the frontdefrost button to defrost the front windshield.

-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fogor moisture. Turn the mode knob to this position toselect this setting. This setting will deliver air to the floorand windshield outlets.

0 (Defrost): Turn the mode knob to this position todefrost the windshield. The system will automaticallycontrol the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTOmode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) orwarmer, your air conditioning compressor willautomatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry thewindshield. The air conditioning indicator light willblink three times if you try to turn off the compressorwhile in this mode.

3-29


Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light above thebutton will come on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 15 minutes after the buttonis pressed. If you need additional warming time,press the button again.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear window defogger will remain ononce the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors this button will alsoactivate that feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the reardefogger and heated mirrors will automatically be turnedon if it is cold outside. The indicator light will not beon. When the vehicle transitions out of remotestart mode the rear defogger and heated mirrors willturn off.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheels on the air outlets, located on thecenter and on the sides of the instrument panel, tochange the horizontal direction of the airflow. Use thetabs on the outlet vanes to change the vertical directionof the airflow. Use the tabs on the outlet vanes toshut off airflow to the outlets.

The two upper outlets in the center of the instrumentpanel are dedicated to the rear seats. These outlets arefixed to aim airflow into the rear seats to help coolthe rear occupants in hot weather. Airflow can be shutoff at the upper outlets by turning the verticalthumbwheel. The louvers are fixed, do not attempt tomove them or they may break.

3-30


Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of your vehicle moreeffectively.

• When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle isencountered, use the recirculation mode, with thetemperature knob at a comfortable setting to preventthe odor from entering the vehicle through theventilation system. This can be helpful when drivingthrough a long tunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of this mode in cold orcool weather can cause window fogging.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the section thattells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly — and even dangerous. So please get to knowyour warning lights and gages. They are a big help.

3-31


Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know howfast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.

Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explainedon the following pages.

United States version shown, Canada Similar

3-32


Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. Thedigital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries toturn it back.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs anew odometer installed. If the new one can be set tothe mileage total of the old odometer, then it mustbe. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label mustbe put on the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far you have drivensince you last reset it.

The trip odometer is accessed and reset through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-46 for more information.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

3-33


Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON, a chime will come onfor several seconds to remind people to fastentheir safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 1-51.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, yourairbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

3-34


{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflate without acrash. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle serviced right awayif the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Light

The charging system lightwill come on for a fewseconds when you turn onthe ignition as a checkto show you it is working.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving and youhear a chime, you may have a problem with theelectrical charging system. It could indicate that youhave a loose generator drive belt or another electricalproblem. Have it checked right away. Driving whilethis light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, becertain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

3-35


Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part canstill work and stop you. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parking brake.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a LowBrake Fluid or Push Park Pedal message. Thesemessages might help to determine why the brakesystem warning light is on. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-50.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-35.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake system warninglight on can lead to an accident. If the lightis still on after you have pulled off the roadand stopped carefully, have the vehicle towedfor service.

United States Canada

3-36


Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has theanti-lock brake system, thelight will come on whenyour engine is started andmay stay on for severalseconds. That’s normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If the lightcomes on and the chime sounds when you are driving,stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to reset the system. If thelight still stays on, or comes on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on, you do not haveanti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your regularbrakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36earlier in this section.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will come onbriefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This isnormal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing theTC (traction control) button located on the centerconsole, the light will come on and stay on. To turnthe system back on, press the button again andthe warning light should go out.

• If there’s a brake system problem that is specificallyrelated to traction control, the ETS will turn off andthe warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time when thesystem is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

3-37


Enhanced Traction SystemActive Light

If your vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightwill come on whenthe system is limitingwheel spin.

Slippery road conditions may exist if the EnhancedTraction System active light comes on, so adjust yourdriving accordingly.

The light will stay on for a few seconds after the systemstops limiting wheel spin.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicates thatthe engine coolant hasoverheated or theradiator cooling fanis not working.

This light will come on briefly when you turn on theignition as a check to show you it is working.

If the vehicle has been operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Cooling System on page 5-26 for more information.

3-38


Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If thegage pointer moves into the red area, the light comeson and you hear a chime, your engine is too hot! Itmeans that your engine coolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle under normaldriving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop yourvehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-24.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.


3-39


Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after awhile, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good, and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of yourvehicle or the replacement of the original tires withother than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control systemon your vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

3-40


If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fixany mechanical or electrical problems that mayhave developed.

3-41


Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle wouldbe considered not ready for inspection. This canhappen if you have recently replaced your battery or ifyour battery has run down. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several days ofroutine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Oil Pressure Light

If you have low engine oilpressure, this light will stayon after you start yourengine, or come onand you will hear a chimewhen you are driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receiving enoughoil. The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on, you may have aproblem with the bulb. Have it fixed right away.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

3-42


Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turn thekey toward start. Thelight will stay on until theengine starts.

If the light comes on continuously while driving andstays on, there may be a problem with thePASS-Key® III + system. Your vehicle will not beprotected by PASS-Key® III +, and you should seeyour dealer.

If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent alarmsystem, the security light will also turn on to indicate thatarming has been initiated. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-17 for more information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control is turnedoff. See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for moreinformation.

Highbeam On Light

This light will illuminatewhen the headlamp highbeams are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

3-43


Service Vehicle Soon Light

This light will come on anda chime will sound if itdetects a problem onthe vehicle.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display amessage such as Low Coolant, Power Steering, EngineReduced Power, etc. These messages may help youdetermine why the service vehicle soon indicator is on.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50. Ifthis happens, see your GM dealer for necessary repairsto maintain top vehicle performance.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you haveleft, when the ignition is on. When the indicator nearsempty, the amber light located left of the pump symbolwill come on and you will hear a chime. You stillhave a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.The arrow on the fuel gage points to side of the vehiclewith the fuel door.


3-44


Here are four things that some owners ask about.These are normal and do not indicate a problem withyour fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half the tank’s capacity tofill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn offthe ignition.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) provides thefollowing:

• A way to personalize your vehicle

• Trip information

• Warning messages

The buttons used toactivate the DIC arelocated on the leftside of the vehicle’saudio controls.

INFO (4): Press this button to scroll through the vehicleinformation mode displays.

MENU: Press this button to enter and scroll through themenu mode.

ENTER (r): Press this button to select a menuoption or to acknowledge a warning message.

The DIC messages will be read through your audiosystem display.

Unites States versionshown, Canada similar

3-45


DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is ON. If yourvehicle has the uplevel audio system, the timeand outside temperature will be shown on the first lineof the display and the DIC information will be onthe second line of the display.

The DIC has different modes which can be accessedby pressing the DIC buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following.

Information Mode (INFO Button)Use the INFO button to scroll through the vehicleinformation mode displays in the following order:

• TRIP Odometer A

• TRIP Odometer B

• FUEL RANGE (Fuel Range Until Empty)

• ECON (Average Fuel Economy)

• AV SPEED (Average Vehicle Speed)

• OIL LIFE (Engine Oil Life System)

TRIP A or TRIP B: Press the INFO button until TRIP Aor TRIP B is displayed. This shows the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for each tripodometer in either miles or kilometers. Both odometerscan be used at the same time. Each trip odometer

can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holdingthe ENTER button for a few seconds while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

FUEL RANGE: Press the INFO button until FUELRANGE appears, to display the remaining distance youcan drive without refueling. It’s based on fuel economyand the fuel remaining in the tank.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range isan average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.Fuel range cannot be reset.

ECON: Press the INFO button until ECON appears inthe display. Average fuel economy is how manymiles per gallon or liters per 100 kilometers your vehicleis getting based on current and past driving conditions.

Press and hold the ENTER button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy. Averagefuel economy will then be calculated starting fromthat point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, itwill be continually updated each time you drive.

AV SPEED: Press the INFO button until AV SPEEDappears in the display. This is the vehicle’s averagespeed in miles per hour or kilometers per hour.

Press and hold the ENTER button while AV SPEED isdisplayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

3-46


OIL LIFE: Press the INFO button until OIL LIFEappears in the display. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after an oilchange. It will alert you to change your oil on a scheduleconsistent with your driving conditions. In addition tothe engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oilon page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.

PersonalizationThe following options can be accessed in order bypressing the MENU button anytime while the vehicle isin on. Press this button to scroll through each option.All of the personalization options may not be availableon your vehicle. Only the options available will bedisplayed on your DIC.

• Oil Life Reset

• Units Selection (English/Metric)

• Remote Start Capability

• Horn Chirp During Remote Keyless Entry Locking

• Horn Chirp During Remote Keyless Entry Unlocking

• Exterior Light Flash During Remote KeylessEntry Locking or Unlocking

• Delayed Locking

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: Specific Doors

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: When Key is Off orWhen Shift To Park

• Exterior Perimeter Lighting During Remote KeylessEntry Unlock

• Security System Passive or Remote KeylessEntry Arming

• Select Language: (English, French, Spanishor German)

When the desired option is reached, use the ENTERbutton to toggle between the modes of that option.To make a selection, press the MENU button again.

If no selection is made within ten seconds, the displaywill revert back to the previous information displayed.

The MENU mode is exited when the INFO buttonis pressed, a ten second time period has elapsed, theignition is turned to off or the end of the MENU listis reached.

3-47


The following display messages may appear on yourvehicle’s audio display by pressing the MENU button:

OIL LIFE RESET: When this option is displayed,you can reset the engine oil life system. To reset thesystem to 100%, press and hold the ENTER button forat least one second. An ACKNOWLEDGED displaymessage will appear for three seconds or until the nextbutton is pressed. This will tell you the system hasbeen reset. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18for more information.

UNITS: When UNITS appears on the display, press theENTER button to move between Metric or English.When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton to record your selection. The initial settingfrom the factory is English.

If you choose English, all information will be displayedin English units. For example, distance in miles and fueleconomy in miles per gallon is displayed.

If you choose metric, all information will be displayed inmetric units. For example, distance in kilometers andfuel economy in liters per 100 kilometers is displayed.

The unit measurement will also change the tripodometer, temperature and average fuel economydisplays.

REMOTE START: The remote start feature, ifequipped, can be enabled or disabled. When REMOTESTART appears on the display, press the ENTERbutton to move between OFF and ON. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

LOCK HORN: If your vehicle has remote keylessentry, this feature which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp every time the LOCK button on the remote keylessentry transmitter is pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press the ENTER button to move between ON and OFF.When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton to record your selection. The initial setting fromthe factory is OFF.

UNLOCK HORN: If your vehicle has remote keylessentry, this feature which allows the vehicle’s hornto chirp every time the UNLOCK button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed, can be enabledor disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears onthe display, press the ENTER button to move betweenON and OFF. When you have made your choice,press the MENU button to record your selection. Theinitial setting from the factory is OFF.

3-48


LIGHT FLASH: If your vehicle has remote keylessentry, this feature which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to flash every time the LOCK orUNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitteris pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHTFLASH appears on the display, press the ENTER buttonto move between OFF and ON. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

DELAY LOCK: The delayed locking feature, whichdelays the actual locking of the vehicle, can be enabledor disabled. When DELAY LOCK appears on thedisplay, use the ENTER button to move between OFFand ON. When you have made your choice, pressthe MENU button to record your selection. The initialsetting from the factory is ON.

AUTO UNLK: The automatic door unlocking feature,which allows the vehicle to automatically unlock certaindoors can be enabled or disabled. When AUTOUNLK appears on the display, use the ENTER button tomove between: ALL, DRVR or NONE. When youhave made your choice, press and the MENU button torecord your selection. The initial setting from thefactory is ALL.

UNLK: This feature determines when the automaticdoor unlocking will occur, when either the key is turnedto OFF or the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). WhenUNLK appears on the display, use the ENTER button tomove between KEY OFF and SHIFT TO P. Whenyou have made your choice, press the MENU button torecord your selection. The initial setting from thefactory is SHIFT TO P.

EXT LIGHTS: If your vehicle has remote keyless entry,this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the UNLOCKbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter ispressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXTLIGHTS appears on the display, use the ENTER buttonto move between ON and OFF. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

SECURITY: If your vehicle has the remote keylessentry system, this feature allows you to select themethod used to arm the vehicle’s security system. WhenSECURITY appears on the display, use the ENTERbutton to move between RKE and PASSIVE. When youhave made your choice, press the MENU button torecord your selection. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 2-17 for more information.

3-49


LANGUAGE: To select your choice of language, usethe ENTER button to move between the optionallanguages.

The languages are English, French, German andSpanish.

Choosing a language will display all of the informationon the DIC in the desired language.

When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton for at least one second to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is ENGLISH.

ENTER: The ENTER button is used to reset certainfunctions and turn off or acknowledge messages on theDIC display. The ENTER button also toggles throughthe options available in each personalization menu.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages will appear if there is a problemsensed in one of your vehicle’s systems.

Any message will clear when the vehicle’s condition isno longer present. The warning message will come backon the next time the vehicle is turned off and back onif the condition is still present. With most messages,a warning chime will sound when the message isdisplayed. Your vehicle may have other warningmessages.

AUTO LIGHTS OFF: This message is displayed if theautomatic headlamp system is disabled with theheadlamp switch.

AUTO LIGHTS ON: This message is displayed if theautomatic headlamp system is enabled with theheadlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUID: This message will display if the ignitionis in ON to inform the driver that the brake fluid levelis low. Have the brake system serviced by yourGM dealer as soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOON: This message is displayed whenthe life of the engine oil has expired and it should bechanged.

When you acknowledge the Change Engine Oilmessage by clearing it from the display, you still mustreset the engine oil life system separately. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-18 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information.

CHECK GAS CAP: This message will appear if the gascap has not been fully tightened. You should recheckyour gas cap to ensure that it is on properly. A fewdriving trips with the cap properly installed should turnthe display off.

3-50


DOOR AJAR: This message is displayed if one ormore of the vehicle’s doors are not closed properly.When this message appears, you should make sure thatthe door is closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLED: This message is displayed if thestarting of the engine is disabled. Have your vehicleserviced by your GM dealer immediately.

ENG PWR REDUCED: This message informs you thatthe vehicle has reduced engine power to avoiddamaging the engine.

ICE POSSIBLE: This message appears when theoutside air temperature is cold enough to create icyroad conditions.

KEY FOB BATT LOW: This message is displayed ifthe remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low.

LOW COOLANT: This message is displayed whenthere is a low level of engine coolant. Have thecooling system serviced by your GM dealer as soonas possible.

LOW FUEL: This message is displayed when yourvehicle is low on fuel. You should refill the tank as soonas possible. You will also see a low fuel warning lighton the instrument panel cluster.

LOW WASHER FLUID: This message is displayedwhen your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. Youshould refill the tank as soon as possible.

POWER STEERING: This message is displayed if aproblem has been detected with the electric powersteering. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealerimmediately.

PUSH PARK PEDAL: This message is displayed if theparking brake is left engaged.

SERVICE AIR BAG: There is a problem with the airbagsystem when this message appears. Let only aqualified technician work on your vehicle. Have yourvehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately.

TRUNK OR GATE AJAR: This message is displayedwhen the trunk lid or liftgate of your vehicle is not closedcompletely. You should make sure that the trunk lid orliftgate is closed completely.

3-51


Audio System(s)Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it canbe added by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can be added,it is very important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the operation of sound equipmentthat has been added improperly.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, findout what your audio system can do, and how to operateall of its controls.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can beplayed even after the ignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for moreinformation.

Setting the Time for Radios withoutRadio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. The clocksymbol will appear on the display and the hour numberwill flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or todecrease. To set the minutes, press the clock buttonagain. The minute numbers will flash. Then turn the ADJknob to increase or to decrease. The time can be setwith the ignition on or off.

3-52


Setting the Time for Radios withRadio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. The clocksymbol will appear on the display and the hour numberwill flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or todecrease. To set the minutes, press the clock buttonagain. The minute numbers will flash. Then turn the ADJknob to increase or to decrease. The time can be setwith the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold the clock button to enter the clock set mode, thenpress and hold the clock button for three secondsuntil UPDATED appears on the display. If the time isnot available from the station, NO UPDATE will appearon the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to anRDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes forthe time to update.

Radio with CD (Base Level)

United States shown, Canada similar

3-53


Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the time and the temperature or the radiostation frequency and the temperature. When the ignitionis off, press this knob to display the time.

To change the default on the display, press the DISPknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beepand the selected display will now be the default.

Finding a Station

AM/FM/CD: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, and CD. The display will show the selection.

ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

SEEKw / SEEKx: Press the SEEK up button or theSEEK down button to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK button fortwo seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to astation, play for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press either SEEK button again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEKbutton for more than four seconds until you heartwo beeps. The radio will go to the first preset stationstored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, thengo on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK buttonagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM/FM/CD to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-54


Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass or thetreble, press and release the tone button until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob toincrease or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, selectBASS or TREB. Then press and hold the tone buttonfor more than two seconds. You will hear a beep andthe level will be adjusted to the middle position.

To adjust the tone controls to the middle position, firstend out of tone by pressing another button, causing theradio to perform that function, or by waiting five secondsfor the display to return to the default display. Thenpress and hold the tone button for more thantwo seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTEREDwill appear on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE /S (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance between the right and the left speakers, pressand release the balance and fade button until BALappears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move thesound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release the balance and fade

button until FADE appears on the display. Then turn theADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the balanceand fade button for more than two seconds. Youwill hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to themiddle position.

To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,first end out of balance and fade by pressing anotherbutton, causing the radio to perform that function, or bywaiting five seconds for the display to return to thedefault display. Then press and hold the balance andfade button for more than two seconds until you hear abeep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated foryour vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appearson the display it means that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for your vehicle and must bereturned to the dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicleto the dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer.

3-55


Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. Ifyou want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP knob.

As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

1s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. The elapsed time of the track will appearon the display.

2\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton toplay the passage. The elapsed time of the track willappear on the display.

3 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear atrack over again. REPEAT ON and RPT will appearon the display. The current track will continue to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEATOFF will appear on the display and RPT will disappearfrom the display.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. T#,RANDOM, and RDM will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOM OFFwill appear on the display and RDM will disappear fromthe display.

SEEKw: Press this button to go to the next track.The track number will appear on the display. If thisbutton is pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving forward through the CD.

3-56


If this button is held for more then two seconds, the CDwill enter CD scan mode and the CD will play thefirst 10 seconds of each track. Press this button again tostop scanning.

SEEKx: Press this button to go to the start of thecurrent track if more than eight seconds have played.The track number will appear on the display. If thisbutton is pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward through the CD.

If this button is held for more then two seconds, the CDwill enter CD scan mode and the CD will play thefirst 10 seconds of each track. Press this button againto stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see the currenttrack number, time, and temperature or the tracknumber, the elapsed time of the track, and thetemperature.

To change the default on the display, press this knobuntil you see the display you want, then hold theknob for two seconds. You will hear a beep and theselected display will now be the default.

AM/FM/CD: Press this button when listening to theradio to play a CD.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject may be activated with either the ignition orradio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

3-57


Radio with CD (Up Level) Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected typeof programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display insteadof the frequency. RDS stations may also providethe time of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.


3-58


XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is basedin the 48 contiguous United States. XM™offers 100 coast-to-coast channels including music,news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text informationthat includes song title and artist name. A servicefee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. Formore information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.comor call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the time and the temperature or the radiostation frequency and the temperature. When the ignitionis off, press this knob to display the time.

For RDS, press this knob to change what appears onthe display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press this knob while inXM mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the DISPknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beepand the selected display will now be the default.

AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appearon the display. Each higher setting will allow formore volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.Then as you drive, automatic volume increasesthe volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyspeed. The volume level should always sound the sameto you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear onthe display if the radio cannot determine the vehiclespeed or if the engine is not running. To turn automaticvolume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFFappears on the display.

3-59


Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.


x SEEK w: Press the down or up arrow to go to thenext or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go toa station, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.The radio will go to the first preset station stored on thepushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on tothe next preset station. Press either arrow again to stopscanning presets.


Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press AUTO TONE or AUTO EQ to select theequalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set will return and the equalization thatwas selected will be stored for that pushbutton.


3-60


Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press and release thisbutton until BASS, MID, or TREB appears on thedisplay. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to decrease.The display will show the bass, midrange, or treblelevel. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB. Then press andhold the tone button for more than two seconds. You willhear one beep and the tone control will be adjusted tothe middle position.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, pressand hold the tone button when no tone control isdisplayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the displayand you will hear a beep. The bass, midrange, andtreble will be adjusted to the middle position.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select customizedequalization settings designed for country, jazz,talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO TONEor AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on thedisplay. You can also manually adjust the bass,midrange, and treble using the tone button.


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the left speakers,push and release the balance and fade button until BALappears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the balance and fadebutton until FADE appears on the display. Turn theADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, selectBAL or FADE. Then press and hold the balance andfade button for more than two seconds. You willhear one beep and the speaker control will be adjustedto the middle position.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position,push and hold the tone button when no speakercontrol is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on thedisplay and you will hear one beep. The balance andfade will be adjusted to the middle position.

3-61


Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE for XM anda program type will appear on the display.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theSEEK up arrow to select the PTY and to take you tothe PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY press theSEEK up arrow again. If the radio cannot find thedesired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear onthe display and the radio will return to the laststation you were listening to.After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPEbutton is pressed again, the radio will exit programtype select mode.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. FM ALT FREQON and AF will appear on the display. The radiomay switch to stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. FM ALT FREQ OFF will appearon the display and AF will disappear from the display.The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is low ora CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop duringthe announcement. Alert announcements cannot beturned off.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

3-62


MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,MSG will appear on the display. Press this button tosee the message. The message may display the artist,song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the MSGbutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, MSG will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe MSG button. You can view the last message until anew message is received or a different station istuned to.

When a message is not available from a station, NOMESSAGE will appear on the display.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAFFIC appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radiostation you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to astation that does. When a station that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radio will stop seekingand TRAF and brackets will appear on the display.

If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC INFO will appearon the display.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turnoff the traffic announcements.

The radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of aCD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated foryour vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appearson the display, it means that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for your vehicle and it mustbe returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicleto your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-63


XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display

Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavl Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

3-64


XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display


No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour GM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Check DAB Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period oftime, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with yourGM dealer.

3-65


Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first pressthe eject button or the DISP knob.

As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.





s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to hear a trackover again. REPEAT ON and RPT will appear onthe display. The current track will continue to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT OFFwill appear on the display and RPT will disappearfrom the display.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order. T#, RANDOM,and RDM will appear on the display. T and thetrack number will appear on the display when eachtrack starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off randomplay. RANDOM OFF will appear on the display andRDM will disappear from the display.

3-66


x SEEKw: Press the down arrow to go to the startof the current track if more than eight seconds haveplayed. If this arrow is pressed more than once,the player will continue moving backward throughthe CD.

Press the up arrow to go to the start of the next track.If this arrow is pressed more than once, the playerwill continue moving forward through the CD.

If either arrow is held or pressed for more than twoseconds, the CD will enter CD scan mode and the CDwill play the first 10 seconds of each track. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. T, the track number, andthe elapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay. To change the default on the display, time orelapsed time, press the knob until you see the displayyou want, then hold the knob for two seconds. The radiowill produce one beep and the selected display willnow be the default. Pressing this button will also displaytext on commercially recorded CDs (if available).

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select the desiredequalization setting while playing a CD. The equalizationwill be automatically recalled whenever a CD isplayed. For more information, see AUTO TONE/AUTOEQ listed previously in this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or toaccess a remote device (if installed) when listeningto the radio.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject may be activated with either the ignition orradio off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

3-67


CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the displayand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:








If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it toyour GM dealer when reporting the problem.

Radio with Cassette and CD


3-68


Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.


• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected typeof programming



• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.


While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coastto coast channels including music, news, sports,talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides digitalquality audio and text information that includes songtitle and artist name. A service fee is required in orderto receive the XM™ service. For more information,contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio



DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween time and temperature or radio station frequencyand temperature. When the ignition is off, push thisknob to display the time.

For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

3-69


For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knobwhile in XM mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the DISPknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. You will hear a beep and theselected display will now be the default.

AUTOu (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appearon the display. Each higher setting will allow formore volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the display if the radiocannot determine the vehicle speed or if the engine isnot running. To turn automatic volume off, pressthis button until AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,or AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.






3-70










TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press and release thisbutton until BASS, MID, or TREB appears on thedisplay. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to decrease.The display will show the bass, mid, or treble level.If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB. Then press andhold the tone button for more than two seconds. You willhear one beep and the tone control will be adjusted tothe middle position.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, pressand hold the tone button when no tone control isdisplayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the displayand you will hear a beep. The bass, midrange, andtreble will be adjusted to the middle position.

3-71



The equalization setting last chosen will appear onthe display when you first press this button. Each timethis button is pressed, another equalization settingwill appear on the display and automatic tone orautomatic equalization will switch to that presetequalization setting.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO TONEor AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on thedisplay. Manually adjust the bass, midrange, and trebleusing the tone button.


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the left speakers,push and release this button until BAL appears on thedisplay. Turn the ADJ knob to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade, push and release the balance andfade button until FADE appears on the display. Turn theADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the balanceand fade button for more than two seconds. You willhear one beep and the speaker control will be adjustedto the middle position.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position,push and hold the tone button when no speakercontrol is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on thedisplay and you will hear one beep. The balance andfade will be adjusted to the middle position.

3-72





3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theSEEK up arrow to take you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY, press theSEEK up arrow again. If the radio cannot find thedesired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear onthe display and the radio will return to the laststation you were listening to.After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPEbutton is pressed again, the radio will exit programtype select mode.




RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is low ora cassette tape or a CD is playing. If a cassette tape orCD is playing, play will stop during the announcement.Alert announcements cannot be turned off.


3-73



If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the MSGbutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, MSG will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe MSG button. You can view the last message until anew message is received or a different station istuned to.


TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand when a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, theradio will stop and TRAF and brackets will be displayed.

When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radiostation you will hear it. If no station is found, NOTRAFFIC INFO will appear on the display.

If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAFbutton to turn off the traffic announcements.

Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of aCD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.


Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated foryour vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appearson the display, it means that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicle and must be returnedto your GM dealer for service.



3-74









No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.










3-75










XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour GM dealer.





Check DAB Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with yourGM dealer.

3-76


Playing a Cassette TapeThe tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapeslonger than that are so thin they may not work well inthis player. The longer side of the tape visible shouldface to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbledsound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press theeject button to remove the tape and start over.

If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button orthe RCL knob to insert and to begin play of a tape. Ifthe ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape canbe inserted and will begin playing.

While the tape is playing, use the volume and seekbuttons just as you do for the radio. The displaywill show TP and an arrow showing which side of thetape is playing. The tape player will play the other sideof the tape when it reaches the end.

If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, firstpress the eject button located to the left of the tapeslot or the DISP knob.

Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players willwork in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”later for more information.

The tape bias is set automatically when a metal orchrome tape is inserted.

If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette TapeMessages” later in this section.

s (Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse thetape. Press it again to return to playing speed. Theradio will play the last selected station while the tapereverses. Select stations during reverse operationby turning the ADJ knob.

\ (Fast Forward): Press this button to quicklyadvance the tape. Press it again to return to playingspeed. The radio will play the last selected station whilethe tape advances. Select stations during fast forwardoperation by turning the ADJ knob.

qL (Change Side): Press this pushbutton to play theother side of the tape.

x SEEKw: The tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for seek towork. Press the down arrow to go to the previousselection on the tape if the current selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If pressed when thecurrent selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,it will go to the beginning of the previous selection orthe beginning of the current selection, depending uponthe position on the tape. If pressed when the currentselection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the current selection.

3-77


TAPE SEEK and a negative number will appear on thedisplay while the cassette player is in the previous mode.Pressing the down arrow multiple times will increase thenumber of selections to be searched back.

Press the up arrow to go to the next selection on the tape.If the up arrow is pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving forward through the tape. TAPE SEEKand a positive number will appear on the display.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a tape, CD,or a remote device (if installed) when listening to theradio. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely insidethe radio for future listening.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press this button, located to theleft of the cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Ejectmay be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes maybe loaded with the ignition and radio off if this buttonis pressed first.

Cassette Tape MessagesIf an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, itcould be for one of the following reasons:

TIGHT TAPE: This message is displayed when thetape is tight and the player cannot turn the tape hubs.Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end downand try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with apencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do notturn easily, the tape may be damaged and should notbe used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure theplayer is working properly.

BROKEN TAPE: If this message appears on the radiodisplay, the tape will not play because of one of thefollowing:

• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attemptto get the cassette out. Try a new tape.

CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soonas possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-116.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

3-78


CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player with yourcassette tape player after disabling the tight/loose tapesensing feature on the tape player.

To disable the feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the SRCE button. READY willappear on the display and flash the cassettesymbol.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It willpower up the radio and begin playing.

The override feature will remain active until the ejectbutton is pressed.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. Ifyou want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.





s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release this button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release this button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

3-79


RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to hear a trackover again. REPEAT ON and RPT will appear onthe display. The current track will continue to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT OFFwill appear on the display and RPT will disappearfrom the display.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order. T#, RANDOM,and RDM will appear on the display. T and thetrack number will appear on the display when eachtrack starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off randomplay. RANDOM OFF will appear on the display andRDM will disappear from the display.

x SEEKw: Press the down arrow to go to the startof the current track if it has been playing for morethan eight seconds. If this arrow is pressed more thanonce, the player will continue moving backwardthrough the CD.

Press the up arrow to go to the start of the next track. Ifthis arrow is pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving forward through the CD.

If either arrow is held for more than two seconds, theCD will enter CD scan mode and the CD will playthe first 10 seconds of each track. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. T, the track number, andthe elapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay. To change the default on the display, time orelapsed time, press the knob until you see the displayyou want, then hold the knob for two seconds. The radiowill produce one beep and the selected display willnow be the default. Pressing this button will also displaytext on commercially recorded CDs (if available).

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select the desiredequalization setting while playing a CD. The equalizationwill be recalled whenever a CD is played. For moreinformation, see AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ listedpreviously in this section.BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a tape, CD,or a remote device (if installed) when listening to theradio. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely insidethe radio for future listening.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press this button, located to theleft of the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activatedwith either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loadedwith the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed first.

3-80


CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radiodisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:








Radio with Six-Disc CD


3-81


Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.


• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming



• Seek to stations with traffic announcements


While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is basedin the 48 contiguous United States. XM™offers 100 coast-to-coast channels including music,news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™provides digital quality audio and text informationthat includes song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. Formore information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.


DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween time and temperature or radio station frequencyand temperature. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

3-82


For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knobwhile in XM mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the DISPknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. You will hear a beep and theselected display will now be the default.

AUTOu (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appearon the display. Each higher setting will allow formore volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.Then as you drive, automatic volume increasesthe volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyspeed. The volume level should always sound the sameto you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear onthe display if the radio cannot determine the vehiclespeed or if the engine is not running. To turn automaticvolume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFFappears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.






3-83










TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press and release thisbutton until BASS, MID, or TREB appears on thedisplay. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to decrease.The display will show the bass, mid, or treble level.If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB. Then press andhold the tone button for more than two seconds.The display level will be adjusted to the middle positionand you will hear a beep.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, pressand hold the tone button when no tone control isdisplayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the displayand you will hear a beep.

3-84



The equalization setting last chosen will appear on thedisplay when you first press this button. Each timeyou press this button, another equalization setting willappear on the display and automatic tone or automaticequalization will switch to that preset equalizationsettings.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO TONEor AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on thedisplay. Then manually adjust the bass, midrange, andtreble using the tone button.


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the left speakers,push and release the balance and fade button until BALappears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,push and release the balance and fade button untilFADE appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob tomove the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the balanceand fade button for more than two seconds. Thedisplay level will be adjusted to the middle position andyou will hear a beep.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button when no speakercontrol is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on thedisplay and you will hear a beep.

3-85





3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theSEEK up arrow to select and to take you to thePTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY press theSEEK up arrow again. If the radio cannot find thedesired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear onthe display and the radio will return to the laststation you were listening to.

5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,go back to Step 1.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will searchfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.




RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is low ora CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop duringthe announcement. Alert announcements cannot beturned off.


3-86



If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the MSGbutton. A new group of words will appear on the displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, MSG will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe MSG button. You can view the last message until anew message is received or a different station istuned to.


TRAF (Traffic): If TRAFFIC appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radiostation you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When a station thatbroadcasts traffic announcements is found, the radio willstop seeking and TRAF and brackets will appear on

the display. When a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it. If no station isfound that broadcasts traffic announcements, NOTRAFFIC INFO will appear on the display.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turnoff the traffic announcements.

The radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of aCD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.


Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated foryour vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appearson the display it means that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicle and it must bereturned to your GM dealer for service.



3-87









No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signal should return.










3-88










XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour GM dealer.





Check DAB Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with yourGM dealer.

3-89


Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.





LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:


2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for INSERT CD to flash on the display.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:


2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.You will hear a beep and MULTI LOAD CD,then INSERT CD and the number will appear onthe display.

3. Once INSERT CD and the number appears on thedisplay, load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player will pull the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, INSERT CD and the numberwill appear on the display again. Once INSERT CDand the number appear on the display again, you canload another CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs.Do not try to load more than six.

3-90


To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, theradio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a number foreach CD will be displayed and the currently selected slotnumber will be underlined.

EJECT/Z: To eject a single CD press this button. Theradio will display EJECTING CD # and the single CDsymbol will flash until the CD is ready to be removed.When the CD is ready to be removed it will eject part wayfrom the radio and the display will change to a flashingREMOVE CD # with the single CD symbol flashing untilthe CD is removed. If the CD is not removed within25 seconds the radio will pull it back in.

To eject multiple CDs, press and hold the eject buttonuntil you hear a beep and EJECTING ALL CDS appearson the display with the single CD symbol flashing. TheCD symbol will flash until a CD is ready to be removed.When the CD is ready to be removed it will eject part wayfrom the radio and the display will change to a flashingREMOVE CD # with the single CD symbol flashing untilthe CD is removed. If the CD is not removed within25 seconds the radio will pull it back in. After the CD isremoved the radio will repeat the previous actions until allof the CDs have been removed or a CD is pulled back in.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play.A small bar will appear under the CD number that isplaying, and the track number will appear.


s (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reversequickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reducedvolume. Release this button to play the passage. T#,the elapsed time, and REV will appear on the display.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. T#, the elapsed time, and FWD will appear onthe display.

3-91


RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CDcan be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. REPEAT ON and RPTwill appear on the display. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play. REPEAT OFF will appear on thedisplay and RPT will disappear from the display.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press andhold the RPT button for more than two seconds.REPEAT ON and RPT will appear on the display.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEATOFF will appear on the display and RPT willdisappear from the display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order, onone CD or on all of the CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to inrandom order, press the RDM button. RANDOMTRACKS and RDM will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOMOFF will appear on the display and RDM willdisappear from the display.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded,in random order, press and hold the RDM button formore than two seconds. You will hear a beep,RANDOM ALL CDS, and RDM will appear on thedisplay. Press RDM again to turn off randomplay. RANDOM OFF will appear on the display andRDM will disappear from the display.

x SEEKw: Press the down arrow to go to the startof the current track, if more than eight seconds haveplayed. Press the up arrow to go to the beginning of thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player will continue moving backward orforward through the CD.

To scan the current CD, press and hold either SEEKarrow for more than two seconds. The CD will go tothe next track, play the first 10 seconds, then go on tothe next track. Press either SEEK arrow again tostop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds. The CD will goto the next CD, play the first 10 seconds of the firsttrack, then go on to the next CD. Press either SEEKarrow again to stop scanning.

3-92


DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch betweentime, temperature, and the elapsed time of the track.To change the default on the display (CD#/Track#/Time,CD#/Track#/Temperature, or Track#/ElapsedTime/Temperature), press the knob until you see thedisplay you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.The radio will produce one beep and the selecteddisplay will now be the default.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select the desiredequalization setting while playing a CD. The equalizationwill be set whenever a CD is played. For moreinformation, see “AUTO TONE” or “AUTO EQ” listedpreviously in this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or toaccess the remote device, when listening to the radio.

Using Song List / R Mode

The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the radio on and load it with at least one CD.See “LOAD” listed previously in this section formore information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. IfS-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST buttonto turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the SEEK left arrow tolocate the track to be saved. The track will beginto play.

4. Press and hold the song list button for two or moreseconds to save the track into memory. When songlist is pressed, one beep will be heard immediately.After two seconds of pressing song list continuously,two beeps will sound to confirm that the track hasbeen saved and TRACK number ADDED willappear on the display.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

SONG LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try tosave more than 20 selections.

3-93


To play the song list, press the song list button.One beep will be heard and SONG LIST will appear onthe display. The recorded tracks will begin to play inthe order that they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.Seeking past the last saved track will return you tothe first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.SONG LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press the SEEK arrows to select the desired trackto be deleted.

4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.When song list is pressed, one beep will be heardimmediately. After two seconds of continuouslypressing the song list button, two beeps willbe heard to confirm that the track has been deletedand TRACK number DELETED will appear onthe display.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks aremoved up the list. When another track is added to thesong list, the track will be added to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the song list button for more thanfour seconds. A beep will be heard, followed bytwo beeps after two seconds, and a final beep willbe heard after four seconds. SONG LIST EMPTYwill appear on the display indicating that thesong list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the songlist again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the song list button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removedfrom the display.

3-94


CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the displayand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:









Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includesa DVD player, a video display screen, two sets ofwireless headphones, and a remote control.

This system also functions as a rear seat audio (RSA)system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (Without Rear SeatEntertainment) on page 3-111 or Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(With Entertainment System) on page 3-113 for moreinformation.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may be disabled from the driver’sseat by pressing the power button on the radio twice.To resume use of the RSE system press the RSEpower button.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.The driver cannot safely view the video screenwhile driving and should not try to do so.

The DVD system is designed to be inoperable whenthe vehicle is exposed to extremely low or hightemperatures, in order to protect your system fromdamage. Operate the DVD system under normalor comfortable cabin temperature ranges.

3-95


HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.

The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF button anda volume control. To use the headphones press, theON/OFF button. An indicator light on the headphoneswill illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for more information.Press the button to turn the headphones OFF whennot in use.

If the RSE system is shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters, located at the top of theDVD player, for more than three minutes, theheadphones will shut off automatically to save thebattery power. If you move too far forward or step out ofthe vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control on the headphones.

Make sure that the headphones are worn correctly, leftto right, to ensure the signal is received properly.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat ordirect sunlight. This could damage the headphonesand repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.

If your vehicle is the Malibu MAXX, your vehiclemay have a rear seat storage compartment. Store theheadphones and the remote control in this compartmentwhen not in use.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVDplay, there may be a low hissing noise through thespeakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in thewireless headphones seems excessive, make surethat the headphone batteries are fully charged. Someamount of hissing is normal.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment doorlocated on the left side of the headphone earpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly using thediagram on the inside of the battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery compartment door and tightenthe screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a long period oftime, remove the batteries, and keep them in a cool,dry place.

3-96


Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located on the DVD faceplate on thefloor console. The RCA jacks allow audio and videosignals to be connected from an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.The yellow RCA jack is used for video inputs, thered RCA jack for right audio inputs, and the white RCAjack for left audio inputs. The system requiresstandard RCA cables, not included, to connect theauxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to themanufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connect anexternal auxiliary device such as a camcorder to theRCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device powerand the power on the front of the RSE system. Pressthe play and source buttons at the same time orthe AUX button on the remote control to switch to theauxiliary device. See “DVD Player” and “RemoteControl” later in this section for more information.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices can beheard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle’s Speakers

• Wired Headphones (not included)

Only one audio source can be heard through thevehicles speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device can beheard through all of the vehicles speakers when thefollowing occurs:

• The RSE system is off

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the SRCE buttonis pressed to enable the RSE system

The headphone symbol will appear on the radio displaywhen the RSE system is on and the headphonesymbol will disappear from the display when it is off.

To turn the vehicles rear speakers on and off, press thepower button on the RSE system or on the remotecontrol. When the rear speakers are off, the audio fromthe RSE system can be heard through both thewireless headphones and the vehicles front speakers atthe same time.

The RSE system can be heard through the wiredheadphones, not included, on the RSE system whenthe following occurs:

• The RSE system is on

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

3-97


The volume on the radio may vary when switchingbetween a radio station, CD, DVD, cassette, orauxiliary device.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVDplay, there may be a low hissing noise through thespeakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in thewireless headphones seems excessive, make surethat the headphone batteries are fully charged. Someamount of hissing is normal.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located on the back of the floorconsole. Open the video screen by rotating the screenup and adjust its position as desired.

The video screen may not be able to be rotated up ifthe rear seat is too far forward. See “Rear Sliding Seat(MAXX Only)” under Rear Seat Operation on page 1-8for more information.

When the video screen is not in use, push it down intoits stored position.

The DVD player and display will continue to operatewhen the video screen is in either the up or downpositions.

The window on the RSE system contains the transmitterfor the wireless headphones and the remote control.If the screen is in the closed position, the signals will notbe available for the operation of the headphones orthe remote control.

Notice: Directly touching the video screen maydamage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section for moreinformation.

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located on the end of the floorconsole under the video screen.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on theRSE system and/or by the buttons on the remotecontrol. See “Remote Control” later in this section formore information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of theappropriate region code for the country that the vehiclewas sold in. The DVD region code is printed on thejackets of most DVDs. Video CDs, standard audio CDs,and audio CD-Rs can be played by the DVD player.The video screen will display a menu when an audio CDor CD-R is playing.

If an error message appears on the video screen, see“DVD Messages” later in this section.

3-98


DVD Player Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE systemon and off.

c/Z (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stopplaying, rewinding, or fast forwarding. Press this buttonagain to eject a DVD or CD.

k (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of aDVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CDis playing to pause it. Press it again to continue play ofa DVD or CD. When in menu mode, press this buttonto enter a selection.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): This button is inactivewhen in DVD mode.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). If the front seatpassengers are listening to the DVD player, the rearseat passengers cannot select XM1 or XM2.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenplaying a cassette tape or a CD.

x SEEKw: Press the down arrow to go to thebeginning of the current chapter or track if more thanfive seconds have played. Press the up arrow togo to the next chapter or track. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

xw (Volume): Press the up or down arrow toincrease or decrease the volume on the wiredheadphones, not included. The arrows on the left sideare for the left headphone and the arrows on theright side are for the right headphone.

3-99


Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label sideup, into the loading slot. The DVD player will continueloading the disc and the player will automatically start ifthe vehicle is in run, accessory, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure that theDVD player is on, then press the play/pause button onthe player faceplate or on the remote control.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping ofthe copyright information or the previews. SomeDVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.If the DVD does not begin playing at the main title,refer to the on-screen instructions.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release the stopbutton on the DVD player faceplate or the remotecontrol.

To resume playback, press the play/pause button onthe DVD player faceplate or the remote control.The movie should resume play from where it was laststopped if the disc has not been ejected or the stopbutton has not been pressed twice on the remotecontrol.

If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button hasbeen pressed twice on the remote control, press the playbutton once to resume play at the beginning of thedisc. A resume symbol will appear momentarily on thevideo screen. When the resume symbol is displayed,press the play button again to resume playbackfrom where the disc last stopped.

3-100


Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button, on the DVD player or the remotecontrol, to eject the disc.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, theDVD player will reload the disc after a short period oftime. The disc will be stored in the DVD player. The DVDplayer will not resume play of the disc automatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow on the DVD player and press the desired button.Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect theability of the transmitter to receive signals from theremote control. If the remote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries may need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objectsblocking the line of sight will affect the function of theremote control.

Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat ordirect sunlight. This could damage the remotecontrol and it would not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in the rearseat armrest when not in use.

If your vehicle is the Malibu MAXX, your vehicle mayhave a rear seat storage compartment. Store theheadphones and the remote control in this compartmentwhen not in use.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD playeron and off.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject or to loadthe disc.

P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the remotecontrol backlight on. The backlight will time outafter about eight seconds.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicesthat are highlighted in any menu.

3-101


w,x,o,p (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to navigate through DVD menus.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to view themedia menu. The media menu is different on every disc.Use the up, down, right, and left arrow buttons tomove the cursor around the media menu. After makinga selection, press the enter button. Press this buttonagain to start play of the disc.

u (Wired Headphone Volume): Press the plus andminus buttons to increase or to decrease the volumeof both wired headphones (not included).

O (Screen Brightness): Press the plus and minusbuttons to increase or to decrease the intensity ofthe video screen.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu. Thisbutton will operate only when a DVD is playing and/or amenu is active.

s (Rewind): Press this button to rewind the DVD orCD. To stop rewinding, press this button again. Thisbutton may not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

\ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forwardthe DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright information or the previews.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of aDVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD isplaying to pause it. Press this button again to continuethe play of the DVD or CD.

While in the menu, press this button to enter a selection.When using RSA or an auxiliary device, pressing thisbutton will play a DVD or a CD if they are loaded.

g (Previous Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the current track or chapter. Pressthis button again to return to the previous track orchapter. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

l (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button toadvance to the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

3-102


b (Size): Press this button to change the displaymode for 4:3 aspect ratio movies. This function cyclesbetween NORMAL, WIDE, and FULL video modes.

• Normal The horizontal image is not stretched. Theborders at the left and the right of the picture areblanked. All lines of the vertical image are displayed.

• Wide The horizontal image is non-lineraly stretched.The image tends to be stretched more at theborders then the middle. The borders are notdisplayed.

• Full The horizontal image is linearly stretched.All vertical lines are displayed. No borders arepresent.

z (Display): Press this button to display the title,chapter, the time of a DVD or track number, the timeof a CD, and the menu functions on the video screen.Press this button again to turn off the display item.

} (Audio Compression): DVDs have a wide dynamicaudio range. Audio compression may be used toreduce the difference between soft and loud selectionsof the DVD. Press this button to switch the audiocompression on and off.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the systembetween the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

Setup MenuTo access the setup menu, ensure that a DVD is in theplayer and the video is stopped. Press the displaybutton. Once the menu is activated, use the directionalarrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.

Picture PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menu allows thedefault viewing preferences to be modified. Use theremote control up and down arrow buttons to select.The movie may stop while selections are being made.

TV Shape: The default video screen display maybe selected from 4:3 letterbox, 4:3 panscan, or 16:9.

Black Level Shift: The default black level to the videoscreen may be adjusted.

Video Shift: The default position of the video on thedisplay may be adjusted.

Color Settings: The default color setting of the videoscreen may be selected from Personal, Rich, Natural,Soft, or Animation.

Personal Color: The default setting for Saturation,Brightness, and Contrast may be adjusted.

3-103


Sound PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menu allows thedefault sound preferences to be modified. Use theremote control up and down arrow buttons to select. Themovie may stop while selections are being made.

Analog Output: The default sound output may beselected from Stereo or Dolby® surround.

Dynamic Compression: The default setting may beselected as On or Off.

Karaoke Vocal: The default setting may be selected asOn or Off.

Language PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menu allows thedefault language preferences to be modified. Use theremote control up and down arrow buttons to select. Themovie may stop while selections are being made.

Audio Language: The default DVD playback audiolanguage may be selected from various languages. Theaudio output is dependent on whether a DVD supportsthe selected language.

Subtitle: The default DVD subtitle language may beselected from English, Spanish, or French. The subtitlelanguage is dependent on whether the DVD supportsthe selected language.

Menu: The default on-screen display language may beselected from various languages.

FeaturesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menu allows youto modify the default feature preferences from thedisplay. Use the remote control up and down arrowbuttons to select. The movie may stop while selectionsare being made.

Status Window: The status window may be selectedas On or Off. The status window provides disc type,elapsed time, and number of titles information while themenu bar is displayed or the DVD is stopped.

Help Text: Help text may be selected as On or Off. Ahelp text bar is provided at the bottom of the screendescribing the functions of an item selected from any ofthe user menus.

3-104


Menu BarThe menu bar can be displayed across the top of thescreen by pressing the DISPLAY button on the remotecontrol. Selecting icons from the menu bar allowsadjustments to the audio and video settings. Use theremote control left and right arrow buttons to scrollthrough the menu bar. A description of the highlightedicon will appear at the bottom of the screen. Use thedown arrow to display the options for the highlighted icon.

The movie may stop playing while selections arebeing made.

Current Subtitle Language: The subtitle languagemay be selected as Off, English, Spanish, or French.The actual subtitle language is dependent on whether aDVD supports the selected language.

Current Audio Language: The audio language may beselected as Off, English, Spanish, or French. Theactual audio language is dependent on whether a DVDsupports the selected language.

Smart Color: This color setting may be selectedwithout changing the default from the colorsettings menu.

Sound Mode: This analog output may be changedwithout changing the default from the analogoutput menu.

Frame-by-Frame: The DVD will pause and may beviewed frame-by-frame, in forward or reverse, by usingthe remote control arrow buttons. Press play toresume play of the DVD. DVD audio will not be availableduring selection.

Slow Motion: The DVD will pause and may be viewedin slow motion, at various speeds, in forward orreverse, by using the remote control arrow buttons.Press play to resume play of the DVD. DVD audio willnot be available during selection.

Scan Speeds: The DVD may be viewed in fast motion,at various speeds, in forward or reverse, by using theremote control arrow buttons. Press play to resume playof the DVD. DVD audio will not be available duringselection.

Enlarge Picture: The DVD will pause and the framemay be enlarged by using the remote control arrow keybuttons. Pressing the enter button on the remotecontrol allows panning of the frame using the remotecontrol arrow buttons. Press play to resume play of theDVD. DVD audio will not be available during selection.

3-105


Title: Move between DVD titles by using the remotecontrol arrow buttons.

Chapter: Move between DVD chapters by using theremote control arrow buttons.

Time Search: The user can jump to different areas of aDVD by using the remote control arrow and enterbuttons to select a specific time position.

Favorite Track Selection (FTS): You may program theunit to play only your favorite track selections froma DVD or Audio CD. For a DVD, FTS is accessed fromthe Menu bar. For a CD, the FTS screen will appearon the display immediately when the CD is inserted.From the screen, choose the tracks on the CD that youwish to store, using the remote control right and leftarrows and the ENTER button to select. The player willremember the selections and each time the CD isinserted in the player, only those tracks will be played, ifFTS is turned on. The player can remember selectionsfor up to 50 discs. To remove FTS for a disc, thedisc must be in the player and the highlighted tracksmust be de-selected. Use the right and left arrowbuttons and the ENTER button or select CLEAR ALLon the display.

Not all DVDs support all of the feature defaults in thesetup menus. In the event a feature is not supported,defaults will be provided by the DVD media.

Exit the setup menu by pressing the return buttonon the remote control. If changes are made to the setupmenu, the DVD will resume play from the beginning.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do the following:

1. Unclip the battery door located on the back of theremote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries. Make sure that theyare installed correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a long period oftime, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

3-106


Tips and Troubleshooting ChartProblem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition may not be inrun, accessory, or RAP.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The systemmight be in auxiliarysource mode. Press theAUX button to switchbetween the DVD playerand the auxiliary source.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.

No sound. The volume on theheadphones could be toolow. Adjust the volume onthe right earpiece on thewireless headphones. Ifthe DVD system is beingheard through the vehiclespeakers, adjust thevolume from the radio.The radio must have theRSE enabled by using theSRCE button.

Problem Recommended ActionThe picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Press and release thesize control button on theremote control. This willfill the screen. If there areborders on the top andbottom, the movie mayhave been made that wayfor a standard screen.

I ejected the disc andtried to take it out, butit was pulled back intothe slot.

Eject the disc again.

The language in the audioor on the screen is wrong.

Press the main displaymenu button on theDVD player or the remotecontrol and change theaudio or languageselection on theDVD menu.

The remote control doesnot work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the transmitterwindow. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed. The remotecontrol will not work theRSA control, only theRSE system.

3-107


Problem Recommended ActionHow do I get subtitles onor off?

Press the display buttonon the remote control togo to the DVDs mainmenu. Then follow thescreen prompts.

After stopping the player, Ipush the play button butsometimes the DVD startswhere I left off, andsometimes at thebeginning.

Press the stop button onthe remote control toresume where the DVDleft off. Press the stopbutton twice to start theDVD at the beginning. Ifthe power is off and theDVD is still in the player,press the play button.

The DVD is playing butthere is no picture orsound. The auxiliarysource is running butthere is no picture orsound.

Press and release theAUX button on the remotecontrol or the SRCE andplay buttons on the DVDplayer to get to auxiliaryinput. Check to make surethat the auxiliary source isconnected to the inputsproperly.

The audio or video skipsor jumps.

The DVD could be dirty orscratched. Try cleaningthe DVD.

Problem Recommended ActionWhen I return to the DVDfrom the system menu,sometimes it plays fromthe beginning andsometimes from where itleft off.

If the stop button waspressed once, it resumesplay from where it left off.If the stop button waspressed twice, it will startat the beginning of theDVD. However, if achange was made to themenu the DVD will startfrom where it left off, evenif the stop button was onlypressed once.

The fast forward, reverse,previous, and nextfunctions do not work.

Some commands that doone thing for DVDs willnot always work orperform the same functionfor audio CDs or games.These functions may alsobe disabled when theDVD is playing thecopyright information orthe previews.

3-108


Problem Recommended ActionMy disc is stuck in theplayer. The eject buttondoes not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn thepower off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to force orremove the disc from theplayer. If the problempersists, return to yourGM dealer for furtherassistance.

I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your GM dealerfor assistance.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byblocking the transmittingarea between theheadphones and thetransmitter on the DVDplayer. Make sure nothingis between theheadphones and the DVDplayer.

Problem Recommended ActionDVD System inoperable. In severe or extreme

temperatures your DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C) coulddamage the DVD system.Operate the DVD systemunder normal orcomfortable cabintemperature ranges.

The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that theheadphones are facing tothe front of the vehicle,left and right sides areindicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal is receivedproperly.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and the signalare good.

3-109


DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on the videoscreen:

Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if adisc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,or if the disc format is not compatible.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if themechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched ordamaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will be displayed ifthe region code of the DVD is not compatible withthe region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if thedisc is not properly loaded or ejected.

Disc Not Present: This message will be displayedwhen the play or the stop button is pressed without adisc in the player.

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with video distortion whenoperating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios,Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobilefax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player whenoperating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a clean clothdampened with clean water. Use care when directlytouching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.

3-110


Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Without Rear Seat Entertainment)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to andcontrol any of the sources: radio, cassette, and CDs.An audio or radio source may be listened to but cannotbe changed from the RSE if the front seat passengershave selected the same source from the front seatcontrols. (For example, the radio station selected withthe front seat controls cannot be changed by therear seat control(s)).

The front seat audio controls always have priority overthe RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switchto the same source as the RSA, the RSA will no longercontrol the source.

You can operate the RSA when the main radio is off.

You can use wired headphones (not included) orthe wireless headphones. The wired headphonesconnect to the outlets on the RSA system. The rearseat passengers have control of the volume for eachset of wired headphones. Adjust the volume on thewireless headphones by turning the volume control oneach headset.

Primary Radio ControlsThe following function is controlled by the main radio:

PWR (Power): Front seat passengers can turn the RSAoff by quickly pressing this knob twice.

3-111


Rear Seat Radio Controls

The following functions are controlled by the RSAsystem:

n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. The left knob controls the leftheadphones and the right knob controls the rightheadphones.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the system on oroff. The rear speakers will be muted when the RSApower is turned on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a cassettetape or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tapeor CD will remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the next presetradio station. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to goto the other side of the tape.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs areloaded. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

©¨ (Seek): When listening to the radio, press theleft or the right arrow to go to the next or the previousstation and stay there. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press the left or theright arrow to hear the next or the previous selection.This function is inactive if the front seat passengers arelistening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to the next trackon the CD. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

3-112


Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(With Entertainment System)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to andcontrol any of the sources: radio and CDs. An audioor radio source may be listened to but cannot bechanged from the RSE if the front seat passengershave selected the same source from the front seatcontrols. (For example, the radio station selected withthe front seat controls cannot be changed by therear seat control(s).

The front seat audio controls always have priority overthe RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switchto the same source as the RSA, the RSA will no longercontrol the source.

You can operate the RSA when the main radio is off.

The rear seat passengers have control of the volume foreach set of headphones.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE systemon and off. The rear speakers will be muted whenthe RSA power is turned on.

3-113


1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the next presetradio station set on the pushbuttons on the mainradio. This function is not active if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to goto the other side of the tape. This function is notactive if the front seat passengers are listening to acassette tape.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs areloaded. This function is not active if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.


SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenplaying a cassette tape and CD.

x SEEKw: When listening to the radio, press theup or the down arrow to go to the next or the previousstation and stay there. This function is inactive if thefront seat passengers are listening to thesame band.

When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or the previous selection.This function is inactive if the front seat passengersare listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to thenext track on the CD. Press the down arrow to goto the start of the current track if more than five secondshave played. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

xw (Volume): Press the up or down arrow toincrease or decrease the volume on the wiredheadphones (not included). The arrows on the right arefor the right headphones and the arrows on the leftare for the left headphones.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourvehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically bylearning a portion of the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). If the radio is moved to a differentvehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear onthe display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operateif stolen.

3-114


Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steering wheel. They include thefollowing:

x SEEKw: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station and staythere. The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrowto go to the next or previous track.


1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stationswith a strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to go to the next available CD, if multipleCDs are loaded.

xuw (Volume): Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease the volume.

> (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turnthe sound on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenlistening to the radio, a cassette tape, a CD, or a remotedevice. The inactive tape or CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

3-115


Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Staticcan occur on AM stations caused by things likestorms and power lines. Try reducing the treble toreduce this noise.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals willreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio maydisplay NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Care of Your Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, andextreme heat. If they are not, they may not operateproperly or may cause failure of the tape player.

The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN TAPEto indicate that the tape player has been used for50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If thismessage appears on the display, the cassette tapeplayer needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but itshould be cleaned as soon as possible to preventdamage to the tapes and player. If there is a reductionin sound quality, try a known good cassette to see ifthe tape or the tape player is at fault. If this othercassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean thetape player.

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasivecleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tapehead as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Therecommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealer.

3-116


The broken tape detection feature of the cassette tapeplayer may identify the cleaning cassette as adamaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the following steps:


2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for fiveseconds. READY will appear on the display and acassette symbol will flash for five seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’srecommended cleaning time.After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the brokentape detection feature will be active again.

A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses acassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape headcan be used. This type of cleaning cassette will noteject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may notclean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaningcassette is not recommended.

After the player is cleaned, press and hold the cassetteeject button for two seconds to reset the clean tapetimer. The radio will display TP DECK CLEANEDto show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound qualitymay degrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in good condition before the tape player isserviced.

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solutionand clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, dueto the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-117


Fixed Mast Antenna (MAXX Only)The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If themast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the rear quarter panel.

Backglass Antenna (Sedan Only)The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear windowdefogger, located in the rear window. Make sure thatthe inside surface of the rear window is not scratchedand that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.If the inside surface is damaged, it could interferewith radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rear window defogger.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not clear the inside rear window with sharpobjects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting withmetallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Because this antenna is built into the rear window, thereis a reduced risk of damage caused by car washesand vandals.

If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and theantenna needs to be attached to the glass, makesure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are notdamaged. There is enough space between the grid linesto attach a cellular telephone antenna without interferingwith radio reception.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roofof your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception.

The performance of the XM system may be affected ifthe sunroof is open.

3-118


Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-5Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-7Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-8Steering ........................................................4-9Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12Passing .......................................................4-12Loss of Control .............................................4-14Driving at Night ............................................4-15Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16

City Driving ..................................................4-19Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22Winter Driving ..............................................4-24If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice

or Snow ...................................................4-28Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-29Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-29

Towing ..........................................................4-35Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-35Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-35Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1


Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-10.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enoughfollowing distance. It is the best defensive drivingmaneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never knowwhen the vehicle in front of you is going to brake orturn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distracts fromthe driving task — such as concentrating on a cellulartelephone call, reading, or reaching for something

on the floor — makes proper defensive driving moredifficult and can even cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, orpull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.These simple defensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drivea vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2


Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with aBAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3


There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some othercountries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is0.05 percent in both France and Germany. TheBAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United Statesis 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a needto take sudden action, as when a child darts intothe street? A person with even a moderate BAC mightnot be able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research showsthat alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinalcord, or heart. This means that when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,that person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled is higher than if the person had not beendrinking.

4-4


{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,and judgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You can have aserious — or even fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle go whereyou want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, andthe accelerator. All three systems have to do their work atthe places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle.

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have timeto cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.

4-5


If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better braking andlonger brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, this warning lighton the instrument panel willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-6


The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close to

the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time toapply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop,even though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feela slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into a situationthat requires hard braking.

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and holdit down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheelscan stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannotrespond to your steering. Momentum will carry it inwhatever direction it was headed when the wheelsstopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the verything you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

4-7


In an emergency, you will probably want to squeezethe brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hearor feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.This will help you retain steering control. If you do haveanti-lock, it is different. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 4-6.

In many emergencies, steering can help you more thaneven the very best braking.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system reduces engine power andmay also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.

This light will come onwhen your EnhancedTraction System isengaged and limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhancedtraction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Controlon page 3-11.

The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxleshift lever positions. But the system can upshift thetransaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’vechosen, so you should use the lower gears onlywhen necessary.

When the system is on,this warning light will comeon to let you knowthere’s a problem.

When this warning light is on, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the EnhancedTraction System on. But you can turn the system off ifyou prefer.

4-8


To turn the system onor off, press the ETSbutton on the centerconsole under theclimate control system.

When you turn the system off, the Enhanced TractionSystem warning light will come on and stay on. Ifthe Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spinwhen you press the button to turn the system off,the warning light will come on – but the system won’tturn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longera current need to limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The Enhanced TractionSystem OFF warning light should go off.

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while you are driving, the powersteering assist system will continue to operate until youare able to stop your vehicle. If you lose powersteering assist because the electric power steeringsystem is not functioning, you can steer, but it will takemore effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either direction severaltimes until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in thestopped position for an extended amount of time, youmay notice a reduced amount of power steeringassist. The normal amount of power steering assistshould return shortly after a few normal steeringmovements.

The electric power steering system does not requireregular maintenance. If you suspect steering systemproblems, contact your dealer for service repairs.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50 andService Vehicle Soon Light on page 3-44.

4-9


Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angleat which the curve is banked, and your speed. While youare in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Unless youhave four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hardbraking can demand too much of those places.You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steering througha sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Thosetwo control systems — steering and acceleration — canoverwhelm those places where the tires meet theroad and make you lose control. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 4-8.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-10


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes — but, unless youhave anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.

See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11


Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-12


• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces your areaof vision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a running start that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

4-13


Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route or areaof less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including engine braking by shifting to alower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have any doubt.

If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: Ithelps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not haveanti-lock, then in a braking skid, where the wheels areno longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakesto get the wheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

4-14


Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

4-15


You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare, as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-16


The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber startto separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-17


HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, andraindrops dimple the water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle canbe carried away. As little as six inches offlowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-46.

4-18


City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you wouldfor a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-20.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-19


Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. But theyhave their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

4-20


The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not to your senseof motion. After driving for any distance at higherspeeds, you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-21


Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Donot let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-22


If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,and transaxle. These parts can work hard onmountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gearpossible.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea, or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

4-23


Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

Also see Tires on page 5-46.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-24


Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it may offer the leasttraction of all. You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin andpolish the surface under the tires even more.

Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you willwant to brake very gently, too. If you do have anti-lock,see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-6.This system improves your vehicle’s stability when youmake a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether youhave the anti-lock braking system or not, you will wantto begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel yourvehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Pushthe brake pedal down steadily to get the most tractionyou can.

4-25


Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you canstill steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

4-26


• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

4-27


Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as rockingcan help you get out when you are stuck, but youmust use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transaxle or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transaxle backand forth, you can destroy your transaxle. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-29.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-60.

4-28


Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. Thatwill clear the area around your front wheels. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is ingear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motionthat may free your vehicle. If that does not get youout after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Ifyou do need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 4-35.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-29


Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label isattached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver’s door open, you will find the label attachedbelow the door lock post (striker). The tire andloading information label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-46and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

Label Example

4-30


5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-38 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips. Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

4-31


Item Description Total



750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Item Description Total



1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers, and cargo shouldnever exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

4-32


Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label, found on the rearedge of the driver’s door, tells you the gross weightcapacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out. Do not carry more than 132 lbs (60 kg) inyour trunk.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-33


If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the trunk or rear area of yourvehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forwardas you can. Try to spread the weightevenly. If you have fold-down rear seats,you will find four anchors on the back wallof your trunk. You can use these anchorsto tie down lighter loads. They are notstrong enough for heavy things, however,so put them as far forward as you can inthe trunk or rear area.



• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

4-34


Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicle can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’llwant to make sure your vehicle is prepared to betowed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-21.

4-35


Dinghy TowingTo tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground,follow these steps:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition switch to off.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent your battery from draining while thevehicle is being towed, remove the followingfuse from the engine compartment fuseblock: 20 IBCM 1. See “Engine CompartmentFuse Block” under Fuses on page 5-85.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

6. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to install the fuses once you reach yourdestination. To reinstall a fuse do the following:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Reinstall the fuse.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Neverexceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while towing your vehicle.

4-36


Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear coulddamage it. Also, repairs would not be covered bythe warranty. Never have your vehicle towedfrom the rear.

Dolly TowingTo tow your vehicle with a dolly and two wheels on theground, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed for towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

4-37


Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with a3.5L V6 engine and the proper trailer towing equipment.To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is foryour vehicle, you should read the information in “Weightof the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Buttrailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harderagainst the drag of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higher speeds andunder greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

4-38


If You Do Decide To Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Yourengine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speedfor trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

When towing a trailer on long uphill grades while theoutside temperature is above 85°F (29°C), reduce yourvehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) to avoid overheatingthe engine cooling system.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at:

Chevrolet Customer AssistanceP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-39


Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-29 for more information about yourvehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weightsare proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right simply by moving some items around inthe trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Tireand Loading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-29. Then be sure you don’t go overthe GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weightof the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intendedfor hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use only aframe-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

4-40


• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? Ifyou do, then be sure to seal the holes later whenyou remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can getinto your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 2-30. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes?

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintainthem properly. And because you may have anti-lockbrakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both systems won’t work well,or at all.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

4-41


Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need additionalwiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lampswill also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

4-42


Driving On GradesWhen towing a trailer on long uphill grades while theoutside temperature is above 85°F (29°C), reduce yourvehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) to avoid overheatingthe engine cooling system.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicatoris in the red area, turn off the air conditioning toreduce engine load. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-24.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

4-43


When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’toverfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brakesystem. Each of these is covered in this manual, andthe Index will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-24.

4-44


Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-15Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-21Engine Coolant .............................................5-22Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-24Engine Overheating .......................................5-24Cooling System ............................................5-26Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-30Brakes ........................................................5-31Battery ........................................................5-34

Jump Starting ...............................................5-35Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-40

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-40Headlamps ..................................................5-40Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps .........................................5-42Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-44

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-44Tires ..............................................................5-46

Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-47Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-49Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-52Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-55Buying New Tires .........................................5-56Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-57Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-58Wheel Replacement ......................................5-58Tire Chains ..................................................5-60If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-61Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-62Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-63Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-65Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-70Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-73

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1


Appearance Care ............................................5-74Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-74Vinyl ...........................................................5-76Leather .......................................................5-76Ultra Lux Suede ...........................................5-76Instrument Panel ..........................................5-77Interior Plastic Components ............................5-77Glass Surfaces .............................................5-77Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-77Weatherstrips ...............................................5-78Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-78Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-78Finish Care ..................................................5-78Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-79Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-80Tires ...........................................................5-80Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-81Finish Damage .............................................5-81Underbody Maintenance ................................5-81Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-81Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-82

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-83Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-83Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-84

Electrical System ............................................5-84Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-84Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-84Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-85Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-85Fuses .........................................................5-85Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-86Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-88Rear Compartment Fuse Block .......................5-90

Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-93

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2


ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

5-3


Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4


Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehiclecan affect the airflow around it. This may causewind noise and affect windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer before adding equipment tothe outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you mayget a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. Otherwise, you might damageyour engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerateor drive uphill is considered normal. This does notindicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuelis necessary. If you are using 87 octane orhigher-octane fuel and hear heavy knocking, yourengine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-WideFuel Charter which is available from the Allianceof Automobile Manufacturers atwww.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasolinemeeting these specifications could provide improveddriveability and emission control system performancecompared to other gasoline.

5-5


California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to workproperly. In most cases, you should not have to addanything to your fuel. However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount of additive required tomeet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.General Motors recommends that you buy gasolinesthat are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean. If your vehicle experiences problemsdue to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand ofgasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives thatwill help correct and prevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

5-6


Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motorsdoes not recommend the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugsand the performance of the emission control systemmay be affected. The malfunction indicator lampmay turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GMdealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-7


Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. To open thedoor, insert your finger into the finger depression nextto the fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back tothe right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from thehook on the fuel door.

5-8


{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noiseto stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-78.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fullyinstalled. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed. Thiswould allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-39.

5-9


Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood releasehandle with this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehicleto the left of thesteering column.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push thesecondary hood release handle toward the driver’sside of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainer and putthe hood prop into the slot marked with an arrow.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on thehood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in thehood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood8 to 12 inches (20 to 30 cm) above the vehicle andrelease it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood isclosed and repeat the procedure if necessary.

5-11


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, here is what you will see:

5-12


A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System onpage 5-26.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 5-31.

F. Battery. See Battery on page 5-34.G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-88.H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-30.

5-13


When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

5-14


A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System onpage 5-26.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 5-31.

F. Battery. See Battery on page 5-34.G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-88.H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-30.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down and check the level.

5-15


When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the MIN mark, then you will needto add at least one quart of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-93.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the uppermark that shows the proper operating range,your engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-16


• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

5-17


Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for your engineat extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all you will needfor good performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change will be indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life system to work properly, youmust reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A Change Oil Soon message will come on.Change your oil as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life system maynot indicate that an oil change is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuine GMparts and reset the system. It is also important to checkyour oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must changeyour oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

5-18


How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aChange Oil Soon message being turned on, resetthe system.

After changing the engine oil, reset the system byperforming the following steps:

1. Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for at leastone second. An ACKNOWLEDGED displaymessage will appear for three seconds or until thenext button is pressed. This will tell you thesystem has been reset.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the Change Oil Soon message comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the engine oil life system hasnot reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

5-19


Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace at the first oil change after50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for more information. If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter fromthe vehicle and lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, dothe following:

1. Remove the screws that hold the cover on.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover andreconnect the electrical connector.

5-20


{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned.The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helpsto stop flame if the engine backfires. If it isnot there and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

Automatic Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. Atransaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If aleak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership servicedepartment and have it repaired as soon as possible.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or deliveryservice.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeledother than DEXRON ®-III, Approved for theH-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered by your warranty.Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeledDEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.

5-21


Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-24.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C)

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you donot need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

5-22


Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear ofthe engine compartment. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. Never turn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULLCOLD mark or slightly higher.

If the LOW COOLANT message is displayed in theDriver Information Center (DIC), it means you are lowon engine coolant. Have the system serviced by atechnician as soon as possible.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50 formore information.

5-23


Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fillprocedure is necessary. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-24 and Cooling System on page 5-26.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gage aswell as an engine coolant temperature warning light onyour vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 3-39 and EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-38.

You will also find a LOW COOLANT warning messagedisplayed on your Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50.

5-24


If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning, along with a LOW COOLANTmessage, can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning with no LOWCOOLANT message, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes theengine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

5-25


If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for threeminutes while you are parked. If you still have thewarning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of thevehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is whatyou will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Engine Coolant Surge Tank

3.5L V6 engine shown; 2.2L L4 engine similar

5-26


{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, donot do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark on the front of the coolant surge tank. If itis not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drivethe vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the engine is overheating, both fans should berunning. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-27


How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause your engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLDmark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, butbe sure the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. SeeEngine Coolant on page 5-22 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolantas follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the coolantsurge tank pressure cap — even a little — they



can come out at high speed. Never turn thecap when the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Waitfor the cooling system and coolant surge tankpressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

5-28


Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure cap when thecooling system,including the coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upper radiatorhose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressurecap slowlycounterclockwise (left)about two or twoand one-half turns.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This willallow any pressure still left to be vented outthe discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to the FULL COLD mark on the front of the surgetank. Wait about five minutes, then check tosee if the level is below the FULL COLD mark. Ifthe level is below the FULL COLD mark, addadditional coolant to bring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the FULL COLD mark for at leastfive minutes.

5-29


4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower thanthe FULL COLD mark, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tank until the levelreaches the FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

See your dealer, if necessary.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the manufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.

5-30


Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brakewarning light will come on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-36.

5-31


What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake systemparts so badly that they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in the wrong kindof fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-74.

5-32


Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and may have reardrum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving, except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hear thebrake wear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wearindicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbingnoise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.Also, the rear brake drums should be removed andinspected each time the tires are removed for rotation orchanging. When you have the front brake padsreplaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

5-33


Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, get one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label. Werecommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for batterylocation.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-35 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 3-114.

5-34


Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle inNEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

5-35


4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations oneach vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

5-36


5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

5-37


8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.If the security light flashes, wait until the lightstops flashing.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in thewrong order, electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Remove the jumpercables in the correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.

5-38


A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-39


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-44.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

Headlamps

A. High-Beam HeadlampB. Low-Beam HeadlampC. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp/DRL

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11for more information.

5-40


2. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlampassembly to the vehicle.

3. Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicleby pulling it forward. Use care not to scratch thevehicle with the lamp or the lamp with the fender.

4. Remove the rubber covers from the individualsockets.

5. Unclip the wiringharness and twist thesocket less thanone-quarter turncounterclockwise andremove it.

5-41


6. Remove the bulb fromthe socket. Replacethe old bulb with anew bulb.

7. Turn the socket back into place and reconnect thewiring harness to the socket.

8. Return the lamp assembly to its original position.Be sure to line up the holes in the lamp assemblyto the round ends of the mounting pins.

9. Reinstall the two bolts attaching the headlampassembly to the vehicle.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

1. Open the trunk. See Hood Release on page 5-11for more information.

A. TaillampB. Back-Up LampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp

5-42


2. Remove thetwo fasteners locatedon the inside ofthe trunk at therear of the vehicle.

3. Pull back the trunk trim.

4. Remove the plastic wing nut.

5. Pull out the taillamp assembly and turn the bulbsocket one quarter turn counterclockwise.

6. Pull the bulb to removeit from the socket.Replace the old bulbwith a new one.

7. Reverse the steps to attach the taillamp assemblyto the vehicle.When securing the lamp assembly back into place,align the assembly so that the trunk lid doesn’tcontact it.

5-43


Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up 921Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3157KXHeadlamps

High-BeamLow-Beam

H-9H-11

Taillamp/Stoplamp/TurnSignal Lamp 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear and cracking.

To replace the wiper blade, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the tab that holds the wiper blade to the arm.

3. Pull the assembly down to release it from theU-hooked end of the wiper arm and slide theassembly away from the arm.

4. Slide in the new wiper blade assembly and snap itinto place.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the other wiper, ifnecessary.

5-44


Rear Wiper Blade ReplacementTo replace the rear wiper blade, do the following:

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from thewindow.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper bladeassembly, as shown.

3. Hold the wiper blade refill with the curved sidefacing downward.

4. Remove clip A, shown above, and slide it into theclaw of the wiper blade assembly.

5-45


5. Remove clip B, shown above, and slide it into theremaining claw of the wiper blade assembly.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-29.

• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check alltires frequently to maintain therecommended pressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when your tires arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-52.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

5-46


Tire Sidewall LabellingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typical passengervehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,height, aspect ratio, construction type and servicedescription. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only one sidemay have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-57.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

5-47


(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a tread life of approximately3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be drivenat speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a regular road tirehas lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-73and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-61.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).For more information on tire pressure and inflation seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbersdefine a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype and service description. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire size means the tire is fortemporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-48


Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of theillustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; andthe letter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These characters representthe load range and speed rating of the tire. The loadindex represents the load carry capacity a tire is certifiedto carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. Thespeed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkiloPascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.

5-49


Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code includes the TireIdentification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tire manufacturer, productionplant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-29.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

5-50


Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall, bears white lettering orbears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name moldingthat is higher or deeper than the same moldings onthe other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-52 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-55.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): Atire information system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-57.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-29.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight, and cargo weight.

5-51


Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight andthe original equipment tire size and recommendedinflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading InformationLabel” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to thevehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’sdoor latch. This label shows your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold. The recommendedcold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and an example of the tireand loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-29. How you load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ride comfort, never load yourvehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

5-52


When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do not forget tocheck the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi(420 kPa). For additional information regardingthe compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-73.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tiresare cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary. Ifthe inflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.

5-53


Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-55 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-58 for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-93.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-62.

5-54


When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-55


Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires your vehicleneeds, look at the tire and loading information label. Formore information about this label and its location onyour vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,GM recommends that you get tires with that sameTPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,ride and other things during normal service on yourvehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”(for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels. It’s all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, it was developedfor use on your vehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 5-73.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-56


Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance.(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-57


Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment may need tobe reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your wheels may need to berebalanced.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

5-58


{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

5-59


Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P215/60R16 size tires, don’tuse tire chains, there’s not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can cause damageto the brakes, suspension or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tire chainscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand you or others may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’tspin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has P205/65R15 size tires,use tire chains only where legal and only when youmust. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains thatare the proper size for your tires. Install them on thefront tires and tighten them as tightly as possiblewith the ends securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinningthe wheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle.

5-60


If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-61


Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.



To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you should put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tire, on theother side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how to usethe jack and change a tire.

5-62


Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.

1. For the sedan model, lift the handle on the sparetire cover. The handle may hook on the trunk frontedge weatherstrip to hold the cover out of theway. For the MAXX model, lift the handle to releasethe latch on the spare tire cover.

2. Lift and remove the cover.

3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.Then remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 5-73.

Tire Changing Tools

The tools you’ll be using include the wrench (A) andjack (B). The MAXX model includes an additionalextension.

Sedan Model shown, MAXX Model similar

5-63


1. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise toloosen wheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.

3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by pressingthe button with your index finger and pulling on theend of the wrench. You must do this beforeusing the wheel wrench.

5-64


Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap thathas plastic wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nutcaps. You may need to use the wheel wrenchto loosen them. Do not pry off wheel coversor center caps that have plastic wheel nut caps.

2. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from thewheel to locate the wheel nuts.If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap withoutplastic wheel nut caps, gently pry on the edge ofthe plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel tolocate the wheel nuts.

3. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’tremove them yet.

5-65


4. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest theflat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head istouching the jacking flange under the body. Do notplace the jack under a body panel. The lowerbody panel has an arrow to aid in locating thejacking location.

5. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

5-66


6. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise.Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground sothere is enough room for the compact spare tireto fit.

7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

8. Remove the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

9. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

5-67


10. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded endtoward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or withthe wrench until the wheel is held against the hub.

12. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-68


{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-93 for wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-93 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

13. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence, as shown,with the wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compactspare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compactspare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact sparetire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and wheelnut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

5-69


Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

For the sedan model, store the flat tire and jack in thecompact tire compartment as follows:

1. Remove the center cap from the wheel.

2. Place the tire in the compartment, valve stemdown, with the bolt extending through the wheelcenter hole.

3. Place the jack and wrench over the bolt, insidethe wheel.

4. Secure by tightening the larger wing nut ontothe bolt.

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. Jack

D. Flat Tire(valve stem down)

E. BoltFor the MAXX model, store the flat tire and jack in thecompact spare tire compartment as follows:

1. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellow sleeve)from the jack.

Sedan Model

5-70


2. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor makingsure it contacts the bolt as shown. Secure it withthe bracket and nut provided.

3. With the valve stem up, place the tire on thecompartment floor with the rear of the tire beneaththe trim panel. The tire may not lay completelyflat. Line up a wheel nut hole with the bolt.

4. With the yellow cap in place to prevent the wheelfrom being scratched, screw the bolt extensiononto the bolt through the wheel nut hole.

5. Remove the plug from the center hole of the floorcover by pressing on the tabs on the bottom of thecover. Remove the yellow cap from the boltextension.

6. Fold the rear flap of the cover up and place thecover on top of the wheel. The extension willcome through the center hole in the cover.

7. Secure the cover with the larger wing nut.MAXX Model

5-71


A. Wing NutB. CoverC. Bolt ExtensionD. Flat Tire

(valve stem up)

E. NutF. BracketG. JackH. Bolt

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-73. Store the compact spare tire and tools asshown in the following diagram.

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. Spare TireD. NutE. Bracket

(MAXX model only)

F. Jack (plus boltextension, MAXXmodel only)

G. Bolt

MAXX Model

5-72


Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stopas soon as possible and make sure the spare tireis correctly inflated. The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired orreplaced at your convenience. Of course, it is bestto replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon aspossible. The spare tire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, donot take your vehicle through an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact spare can getcaught on the rails. That can damage the tire andwheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.Using them can damage your vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do not use tire chains onyour compact spare.

5-73


Appearance CareCleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a matchis struck near them or if they get on a hot part of thevehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaledin a closed space. When anything from a containeris used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow themanufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always openthe doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaningthe inside.

Never use these to clean the vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these products unless this manualsays you can. In many uses, these will damagethe vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Fabric/Carpet

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loosedirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaceswith a clean, damp cloth.

Your GM dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery well.

If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux® suede fabric, follow thelisted procedures except do not use any solvents ordry cleaning products.

5-74


Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can — beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to aclean area often. A soft brush may be used if stainsare stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.To clean, use the following instructions:

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.For solids: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum or brush.

2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft whitecloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth shouldnot drip water.

3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabrictoo wet.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned areawith another dry clean, soft white cloth.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to

make sure the cleaner does not affect the color ofthe fabric.

2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, softwhite cloth.For solids: remove as much as possible and thenvacuum or brush.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean,soft white cloth. Do not apply spray directly tothe fabric.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned areawith another dry clean, soft white cloth.

7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up withthe club soda water instructions given earlier inthis section.

5-75


Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee, tea,milk, fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate, vomit,urine, and blood can be removed using the club sodawater instructions given earlier in this section. If an odorlingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the areawith a water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon(5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarmwater. Let dry.

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with anapproved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Thismay have to be done more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain ifthey are not removed quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Ultra Lux Suede

Cleaning Ultra Lux SuedeUse a mild solution of lukewarm water and a neutraldish soap on a soft cloth or sponge. For the followingstains, follow these instructions:

Coffee, Tea, and Milk: Blot with a clean, soft, whitecloth. Then clean with mild soapy water and a cleanwhite cloth.

Cosmetics: Clean with mild soapy water and a cleanwhite cloth.

5-76


Jelly, Syrup, and Fruit: Remove most of the solids,then clean with warm tap water and a clean white cloth.

Oil and Grease: Sprinkle baking soda on the spot,brush, then wipe with a clean white cloth.

Instrument PanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-82.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger and the integrated radio antenna. Whencleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

5-77


WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth ofcolor, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm orcold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. GM-approvedcleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-82. Donot use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does not have enoughclearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, youcould damage your vehicle. Verify with the managerof the car wash that your vehicle will fit beforeentering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and acar washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-78.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 5-82.

The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. Theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

5-78


Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,and chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. To help keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered wheneverpossible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap, or other material may be on the bladeor windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution. Thewindshield is clean if beads do not form when it isrinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

5-79


Aluminum WheelsNotice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because the surface could be damaged. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminumor chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

5-80


Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your GM dealer. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your GMdealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-81


Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches and otherlight surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

5-82


Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andsuede upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, suedeand carpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

5-83


Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On thislabel, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-62.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for eachheadlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overloadwill cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, haveyour headlamp wiring checked right away.

5-84


Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motorcools. If the overload is caused by some electricalproblem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsFuses in the fuse block protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load istoo heavy, the fuse opens protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by fuses and fusible thermal links inthe wiring itself.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick a feature of your vehicle thatyou can get along without — like the radio or cigarettelighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in thecenter of the instrument panel, one in the enginecompartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panelfuse block. It can be used to easily remove fusesfrom the fuse block.

The instrument panel fuse blocks is located at on thelower front side of the console, on the passenger side ofthe vehicle. To access the fuses, open the fuse paneldoor by pulling out.

To reinstall the door, insert the hooks at the front endfirst, then push the door into the center console panel tosecure it.

5-85


Instrument Panel Fuse Block

5-86


Fuses UsagePOWERMIRRORS Power Mirrors

EPS Electric Power Steering

RUN/CRANK Cruise Control, Electronic RangeSelect

HVACBLOWERHIGH (Relay)

Climate Control System

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument Panel Cluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAR OnStar® SystemNOTINSTALLED Not Used

AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag SystemHVACCTRL (BATT) Climate Control System

PEDAL Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalWIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer SwitchIGN SENSOR Ignition SwitchNOTINSTALLED Not Used

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

RADIO Audio SystemINTERIORLIGHTS

Overhead Lighting, Trunk/CargoLighting

Fuses UsageREAR WIPER Rear Wiper System/Washer PumpHVACCTRL (IGN) Climate Control System

HVACBLOWER Climate Control System

DOOR LOCK Automatic Door Lock SystemROOF/HEAT SEAT

Sunroof, Heated Seats, AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror

POWERWINDOWS Power Window Switch



AIRBAG(BATT) Airbag System

FUSE PULLER Fuse PullerSPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare

SPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare



5-87


Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-88


Fuses Usage1 A/C CLU2 Electronic Throttle Control3 Ignition Module4 Transmission5 Fuel Injectors6 EMISSION 17 Left Headlamp Low-Beam8 Horn9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps11 Left Headlamp High-Beam12 Right Headlamp High-Beam13 Powertrain Control Module (Batt)14 Windshield Wiper15 Anti-Lock Brake System16 Powertrain Control Module (IGN 1)17 Cooling Fan 118 Cooling Fan 219 RUN RELAY20 IBCM 121 IBCM (R/C)22 RBEC 123 RBEC 2

Fuses Usage24 Anti-lock Brake System25 IBCM 226 STARTER

27 (DIODE) Windshield Wiper41 Electric Power Steering

42 (Resistor) Brake Lamp Diagnostic

Relays Usage28 Cooling Fan 129 Cooling Fan Mode30 Cooling Fan 231 STARTER32 RUN/CRANK Ignition33 POWERTRAIN34 A/C CLUTCH35 High-Beam Headlamps36 Front Fog Lamps37 Horn38 Low-Beam Headlamps39 Windshield Wiper 140 Windshield Wiper 2

5-89


Rear Compartment Fuse Block The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunkof the vehicle. Access the fuse block through thetrunk panel on the driver’s side of the rear cargo area.

5-90


5-91


Fuses Usage1 Not Used2 Driver Seat Controls3 Not Used

4 (Resistor) Driver Door Key Lock Cylinder5 Emission6 Parklamps7 Not Used8 Not Used9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls11 Not Used12 Auxiliary Power 213 Not Used14 Heated Seat Controls15 Not Used

16Remote Keyless Entry System,XM Satellite Radio, Rear SeatEntertainment System, Homelink

17 Back-up Lamps18 Not Used19 Not Used

20 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

Fuses Usage21 Not Used22 Trunk23 Rear Window Defogger24 Heated Mirror Controls25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage26 Rear Window Defogger27 Parklamps28 Not Used29 Not Used30 Not Used31 Not Used32 Not Used33 Back-up Lamps34 Not Used35 Not Used36 Trunk37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Cargo Lamps

5-92


Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1.35 lbs 0.61 kg

Automatic Transaxle Complete Overhaul 9.5 quarts 9.0 L

Cooling System2.2L L4 Engine3.5L V6 Engine

6.9 quarts10.1 quarts

6.5 L9.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter2.2L L4 Engine3.5L V6 Engine

4.0 quarts5.0 quarts

3.8 L4.7 L

Fuel Tank 16.1 gallons 61.1 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended inthis manual.

5-93


Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.2L L4 F Automatic 0.042 inches (1.06 mm)

3.5L V6 8 Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

5-94


Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13Maintenance Record .....................................6-14

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1


Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive long distances all the time in very hot, dustyweather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in manyother ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench dealer.

6-2


This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-29.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

If you want to get service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it and whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

6-3


Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the Change Oil Soon message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on, it means thatservice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the engine oil life system maynot indicate that vehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer hasGM-trained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the Change Oil Soon message appears, certainservices, checks and inspections are required. Requiredservices are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that your first service be Maintenance I,your second service be Maintenance II and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the messagecomes on within 10 months since the vehicle waspurchased or Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

6-4


Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.An Emission Control Service.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20. An Emission Control Service.See footnotes † and (k).

•

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-46. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

6-5


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers)25,000

(41 500)50,000

(83 000)75,000

(125 000)100,000

(166 000)125,000

(207 500)150,000

(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.An Emission Control Service.

• • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service only).See footnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. Inspect sparkplug wires (V6 only).An Emission Control Service.

•

Engine cooling system service(or every 5 years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. •

6-6


Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GMparts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser is recommended at leastonce a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges andlatches, hood hinges and latches and trunk lid hingesand latches. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better and not stickor squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or binding and fordamaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.Replace any components that have high effort orexcessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruisecontrol cables.

6-7


(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See EngineCoolant on page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist youwith these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.

6-8


Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to checkyour spare tire. See Tires on page 5-46 for furtherdetails. Check to make sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire.If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-62.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench dealer for service.

6-9


Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-27 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but donot start the engine. Without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealerfor service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.

6-10


Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by theparking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).Then release the parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-11


Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol. GMGoodwrench oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Todetermine the proper viscosity foryour vehicle’s engine, see EngineOil on page 5-15.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-22.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

6-12


Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco ® PartNumbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 24577608 A1615C

Engine Oil Filter2.2L L4 Engine3.5L V6 Engine

2446071325010792

PF2244GPF47

Spark Plugs2.2L L4 Engine3.5L V6 Engine

2533747212568387

41–98141–101

Windshield Wiper BladesDriver’s Side – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)Passenger’s Side – 19.6 inches (50.0 cm)Rear – 18 inches (46.7 cm)

226880872268808622730014*

———

*Wiper blade and assembly

6-13


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages.Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-14


Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-15


Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-16


Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ..........................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ....................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-11Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information

7-1


Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).

7-2


The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3


Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishesto write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed toChevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-4


Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgramThis program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you mayrequire for your vehicle, such as hand controls andwheelchair/scooter lifts.

The offer is available for a limited period of time fromthe date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, orto determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

7-5


Roadside Assistance ProgramAs the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as you drivein the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’sRoadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year tospeak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistancerepresentative.

We will provide the following services during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expenseto you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel($5 maximum) for the customer to get to thenearest service station.

• Lock-out Service (identification required):Replacement keys or locksmith service willbe covered at no charge if you are unable to gainentry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacementkey will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Assistance providedwhen the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will becovered at no charge. The customer is responsiblefor the repair or replacement of the tire if notcovered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require abattery jump start will be covered at no charge.

• Dealer Locator Service

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, our RoadsideAssistance Representatives will explain any paymentobligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

7-6


While we hope you never have the occasion to use ourservice, it is added security while traveling for youand your family. Remember, we are only a phonecall away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when, inChevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessivein frequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveroadside assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy TransportationChevrolet has always exemplified quality and value inits offering of motor vehicles. To enhance yourownership experience, we and our participating dealersare proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportationoptions are available when warranty repairs arerequired. This will reduce your inconvenience duringwarranty repairs.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, you shouldcontact your dealer and request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

7-7


If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, Chevrolethelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includesa one way or round trip shuttle service to a destinationup to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may beavailable for the use of public transportation suchas a taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses ofup to a five day maximum may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and be supportedby original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warrantyrepair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.This requires that you sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state, local and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also be responsible fortaxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rentalusage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

7-8


Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingGM dealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your GM dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during theComplete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitoremission control components to optimize fuel economy,to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help thedriver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;other information is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly called eventdata recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as the AirbagSensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehiclemay record information about the condition of the vehicleand how it was operated, such as data related toengine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehiclespeed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlikethe data recorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such as conversation ofvehicle occupants.

7-9


To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the device that storesthe data is required. GM will not access informationabout a crash event or share it with others other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research where appropriateconfidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations for researchpurposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please checkthe OnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and data collection.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

7-10


Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you will notifyGeneral Motors. Please call the Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

7-11


Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12


AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-21Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-84Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-23Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-22, 3-26Airbag

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-34Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9Airbag System ................................................ 1-51

How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-62What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-58Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-54

Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-118Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-118Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ..................................................... 3-118Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-37

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-74Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-80Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-77Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-81Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-78Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-74Finish Care ................................................. 5-78Finish Damage ............................................ 5-81Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-77Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-77Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-77Leather ...................................................... 5-76Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-81Tires .......................................................... 5-80Ultra Lux Suede .......................................... 5-76Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-81Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-82Vinyl .......................................................... 5-76Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-78Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-78Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-79

1


Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-52Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-115Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-118Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-116Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-117Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-117Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-118Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-68Radio with CD .................................... 3-53, 3-58Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-81Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ..................... 3-111, 3-113Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-53Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-52Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-114Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-116XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-118

Automatic Climate Control System ..................... 3-26Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-18Automatic Transaxle

Fluid .......................................................... 5-21Operation ................................................... 2-25

BBackglass Antenna ........................................ 3-118Battery .......................................................... 5-34

Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-21Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6Emergencies ................................................ 4-7Parking ...................................................... 2-27System Warning Light .................................. 3-36

Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-23Brakes .......................................................... 5-31Braking ........................................................... 4-5Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-7Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-40

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-40Headlamps ................................................. 5-40Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-44Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-42Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-56

2


CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications ............................ 5-93Carbon Monoxide ........... 2-13, 2-14, 2-30, 4-24, 4-38Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-77Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-116Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-117Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-117

Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-20Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-40Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-60Charging System Light .................................... 3-35Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-39Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-81Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-38Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-43Older Children ............................................. 1-32Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-46

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 1-46Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-49Top Strap ................................................... 1-41Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-43Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-41

CleaningAluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-80Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-78Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-74Finish Care ................................................. 5-78Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-77Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-77Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-77Leather ...................................................... 5-76Tires .......................................................... 5-80Ultra Lux Suede .......................................... 5-76Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-81Vinyl .......................................................... 5-76Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-78Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-78Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-79

Climate Control System ................................... 3-22Automatic ................................................... 3-26Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30

3


Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-27Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-73Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-39Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-38Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-24

Cooling System .............................................. 5-26Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-11Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-43Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-39Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ........................................ 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .............................. 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-17Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-17Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-19Door

Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11Door Ajar Reminder ..................................... 2-11Locks ........................................................ 2-10Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16Six-Way Power Seat ...................................... 1-3

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-46DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-50

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-15City ........................................................... 4-19Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-20Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22

4


Driving (cont.)In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-29Winter ........................................................ 4-24

DVDRear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-95

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-84Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-88Fuses ........................................................ 5-85Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-84Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-86Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-85Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-90Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-85

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20Battery ....................................................... 5-34Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-39Coolant ...................................................... 5-22Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-39Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-38Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-30

Engine (cont.)Oil ............................................................. 5-15Overheating ................................................ 5-24Starting ...................................................... 2-22

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-8Active Light ................................................ 3-38Warning Light ............................................. 3-37

Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-20Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20Finish Damage ............................................... 5-81Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-118Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-61Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-62Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-70Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-21Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-30

Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-19Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-6Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-20

5


Fuel ............................................................... 5-5Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-44Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5

Fuses ........................................................... 5-85Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-88Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-86Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-90Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-85

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-39Fuel .......................................................... 3-44Speedometer .............................................. 3-33Tachometer ................................................. 3-33

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-36Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-39GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-84Headlamps .................................................... 5-40

Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-18Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-40Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-17Delayed ..................................................... 3-17Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-40High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-17

Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............................... 3-17Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Heater ................................................... 3-22, 3-26Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-43Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-36HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-36Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16

6


IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-21Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-52Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-19Cluster ....................................................... 3-32Overview ..................................................... 3-4

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-35

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-3

LLabelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-47Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-20Cargo ........................................................ 3-20Dome ........................................................ 3-19Exterior ...................................................... 3-14Fog ........................................................... 3-19

Lamps (cont.)Front Reading ............................................. 3-20Rear Reading ............................................. 3-20Trunk ......................................................... 3-20

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ........................................... 1-43Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-46Liftgate .......................................................... 2-14Light

Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-34Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-37Brake System Warning ................................. 3-36Charging System ......................................... 3-35Cruise Control ............................................. 3-43Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-38Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light ............................................. 3-38Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light .......................................... 3-37Highbeam On ............................................. 3-43Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-39Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-42Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-34Security ..................................................... 3-43Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-44

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................... 3-20

Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12

7


LocksDelayed Locking .......................................... 2-11Door .......................................................... 2-10Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12Power Door ................................................ 2-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14Lumbar

Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using Your ................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-39Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Map Pocket ................................................... 2-40Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-50Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-32Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-33Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-32Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-32Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-34Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-34Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-33

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

NNew Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

8


OOdometer ...................................................... 3-33Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-33Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-15Pressure Light ............................................. 3-42

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® System ............................................. 2-34Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30Outside

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-34Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-34Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-33

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPark (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-29

Park (P) Headlamps Off in Park (P) .................. 3-17Parking

Brake ........................................................ 2-27Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-30

Passing ......................................................... 4-12PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-19PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-19Power ............................................................. 1-3

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-21Door Locks ................................................. 2-10Electrical System ......................................... 5-85Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22Windows .................................................... 2-16

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-31Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-36

9


QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15

RRadios .......................................................... 3-52

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-116Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-117Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-117Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-68Radio with CD .................................... 3-53, 3-58Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-81Rear Seat Audio .............................. 3-111, 3-113Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-53Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-52Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-114Understanding Reception ............................ 3-116

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ............ 2-40Rear Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-20Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-27Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ........................ 3-111, 3-113Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-95Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-24Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-32Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® .............................................. 2-33

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-32Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-32Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-35Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-65Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-63Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-44Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-11General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System CheckChecking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-62Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 1-63Restraint Systems

Checking .................................................... 1-62Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-63

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-29Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-31

10


SSafety Belt

Pretensioners .............................................. 1-31Reminder Light ............................................ 3-34

Safety BeltsCare of ...................................................... 5-77Driver Position ............................................ 1-16How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-15Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults ...................................... 1-27Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-24Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-31Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-23

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-6Seats

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Manual ........................................................ 1-2Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-6Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8

Seats (cont.)Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4Six-Way Power Driver .................................... 1-3

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System ................... 1-46Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-46Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-49

Security Light ................................................. 3-43Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............................................. 5-5

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-39Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-44

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-62Setting the Time

Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-53Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-52

Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-81Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-29Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-23Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8Spare Tire

Installing .................................................... 5-65Removing ................................................... 5-63Storing ....................................................... 5-70

11


Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-93Speedometer .................................................. 3-33Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-22Steering .......................................................... 4-9Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-115Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-40Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-39Glove Box .................................................. 2-39Map Pocket ................................................ 2-40Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ......... 2-40

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16Sunroof ......................................................... 2-42

TTachometer .................................................... 3-33Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ........................................ 5-42

Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-114Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-19PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-19

Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-23Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Tires ............................................................. 5-46

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-80Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-56Chains ....................................................... 5-60Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-62Cleaning .................................................... 5-80Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-73If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-61Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-52Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-54Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-65Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-65Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-63Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-70Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-47Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-49Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-57Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-58Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-58When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-55

Top Strap ...................................................... 1-41Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-43Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-35Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-38Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-35

12


TractionEnhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-8Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light ............................................. 3-38Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light .......................................... 3-37Transaxle

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-25Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-33Trunk ............................................................ 2-13Trunk Lamps .................................................. 3-20Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-116Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-57

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivService Soon Light ...................................... 3-44Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders .................................................... 7-9

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-83Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-84

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30Visors ........................................................... 2-16

13


WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-31Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-50Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-58Replacement ............................................... 5-58

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-41Windows ....................................................... 2-15

Power ........................................................ 2-16Windshield

Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-79

Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10Fluid .......................................................... 5-30

Windshield WiperBlade Replacement ...................................... 5-44Fuses ........................................................ 5-85Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24

XXM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-118

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14


2005 chevrolet malibu owner manual

Documents